toledo owner s manual

toledoOwner’s manual

INTRODUCTION ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––1

This oowner’s MManualand the Supplements provided should beread carefully so that you can quicklybecome familiar with the controls andoperation of your vehicle.As well as care and regular maintenance,correct handling helps maintain the car’svalue.For ssafety rreasons pplease nnote aalsothe iinformation oon ““Accessories,modifications aand rreplacement oofparts”.

One ffinal rrequest:Please pass the complete vehicle walleton to the new owner of your vehicle if youshould sell it, as the vehicle literaturebelongs to the vehicle.

ON BOARD LITERATURE

Range oof eequipmentIt describes the largest possible range ofequipment envisaged at the time of goingto press. Some of the equipment may notbe available until later or will only beavailable in certain markets.

✱Items of equipment marked withthis symbol are only availableon certain model versions or are

only available as optional extras on cer-tain models or are only available in cer-tain markets.

Environmental nnotes

❀Texts ffollowing tthis ssymboland pprinted iin iitalics aare iimpor-tant nnotes oon eenvironmental

protection.

ContentsOn the next few pages you will find a con-tents list which lists all of the pointsdetailed in this Owner’s Manual in order.

Alphabetical iindexAt the end of the manual you will find acomprehensive alphabetical index. You can find desired information quicklyby looking for the key in the index.

Notes oon ddirectionApart from exceptions, all notes on thedirection (left, right, front, rear) in thismanual always refer to the vehicle’s direc-tion of travel.Exception: possible specific steeringdescriptions.

Warning nnotes

All bblocks oof ttext iin bbold pprint, wwiththis ccolour bbackground aand tthetitle ““Warning” rrefer tto ppotentialaccident oor iinjury rrisks.

Text iin bbold pprint wwarns aagainst ppos-sible ddamage tto tthe vvehicle oor nnotesparticularly iimportant iinformation oonhow tto ttreat yyour vvehicle ccorrectly.

Official SSEAT sserviceThe SSEAT DDealers, WWorkshops aandOfficial SService CCentres hhave tthe mmostsuitable sspecific ttools aand sstate-of-the-art ttechnology aand sspecialisedstaff tto ddeal wwith aand rrepair aany pprob-lem oor ffault tthat mmay bbefall yyour SSEATvehicle, gguaranteeing rrepairs iinsideor ooutside wwarranty, aand uusing oonlygenuine sspares.Do nnot hhesitate tto ccontact yyourOfficial SSEAT SService CCentre ffor aanyquestion tthat aarises iin tthe aapplica-tion oor iinterpretation oof tthe oopera-tions aand rrevisions rreferred tto iin tthismanual.

STRUCTURE OF THIS MANUAL

You sshould nnote tthese ppoints bbefore rreading tthis OOwner’s MManual

2 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3

Belowwe offer a brief summary of the contentsof the chapters that this InstructionsManual is divided into.

Contents

1. Safety ffirstThis chapter provides information on your vehicle’spassive safety fittings such as seat belts, Air Bags,child seats and safety and head rests.

2. Handling iinstructionsThis chapter provides information on the layout ofthe driver’s controls, the different seat adjustments,how to create a comfortable atmosphere inside thecar, and how to start the engine.

3. Tips aand mmaintenanceAdvice on environmentally friendly driving, care andupkeep of your car and certain breakdowns (such aschanging bulbs) that you can do yourself.

4. Technical ddataNumbers, values, dimensions and amounts (fuelconsumption, for instance) of your vehicle.

INDEX

Introduction to the subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3

Air Bag system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16

Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32

Head restraints* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.33

SAFETY FIRST ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1.1

You will find important information, tipsand notes on passive safety in your newTOLEDO in this chapter.We have detailed everything you need toknow about, for example, seat belts, AirBags, child seats, safety for children andhead restraints.Please ppay pparticular aattention tto tthenotes aand wwarnings iin tthis cchapter–in yyour oown iinterest aand iin tthe iinter-est oof aall ppassengers.Please ddrive ccarefully.

1.2 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INTRODUCTION

SAFETY FIRST

Introduction tto tthe ssubject

Why hhave sseat bbelts?It hhas bbeen pproven tthat sseat bbeltsgive ggood pprotection iin aaccidents. IInmost ccountries, ttherefore, tthe wwear-ing oof sseat bbelts iis rrequired bby llaw.

Warning

• The bbelts sshould bbe pput oonbefore eevery jjourney –– eeven iintown ttraffic. TThis aalso aapplies ttorear sseats. PPregnant wwomen ttooshould aalways wwear aa sseat bbelt.This iis tthe oonly wway tto gguaranteeprotection ffor tthe uunborn cchild!For mmore iinformation oon tthis ppointplease ssee ppage 11.11.

• The rrouting oof tthe bbelt iis oofmajor iimportance tto tthe pprotectiveeffect oof tthe bbelt. HHow tthe bbeltshould bbe wworn iis ddescribed oonthe nnext ppages.

This illustration shows a car drivingtowards a wall. The vehicle occupants arenot belted in.The physical principle of a frontal crash iseasy to explain.As soon as the vehicle is moving, so-called “kinetic energy” is created by themovement of the vehicle , in the vehicleitself as well as in the vehicle occupants.The extent of the “kinetic energy” effectdepends largely on the speed of the vehi-cle and on the weight of the vehicle andthe vehicle occupants.The higher the speed and the greater theweight of the vehicle, the more energymust be dispersed should an accidentoccur.

SEAT BELTS –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1.3

SAFETY FIRST

Seat bbelts

B1H-118

The speed of the vehicle is, however, themore important factor. If, for example, thespeed increases from 25 km/h to 50 km/h, the kinetic energy increasesfourfold!As the vehicle occupants in our exampleare wearing no seat belts, their entirekinetic energy can only be dispersedthrough the crash into the wall, should acrash occur. The consequences would besevere or possibly even fatal injuries.

If you are driving at a speed of only30 km/h to 50 km/h, forces which caneasily exceed 1000 kg are exerted on thebody should an accident occur.The forces exerted on the body willincrease further at higher speeds, e.g. Attwice the speed the forces increase four-fold!Vehicle occupants not wearing their seatbelts are thus not “linked” to their vehi-cle.In a frontal crash, these people will con-tinue to move forward at the same speedas the vehicle was travelling before thevehicle crashed!

1.4 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEAT BELTS

SAFETY FIRST

B1H-119 TO0-003

In case of a frontal collision accident, theoccupants who are not belted up arethrown forwards and collide with parts ofthe vehicle interior, e.g. the steeringwheel, instrument panel or windscreen.Vehicle occupants who are not belted inmay even be thrown out of the vehicle.This could even lead to serious injuries. The wide spread opinion that you can pro-tect your body with your hands in theevent of a light accident is not correct.Even at low speeds of collision, forceswhich cannot be deflected act on thebody.

It is also important that occupants sittingin the rear seats are belted in as they canalso be thrown out of the vehicle in theevent of an accident. Somebody sitting inthe rear and not using a seat belt isendangering not only himself but also theoccupants of the front seats.

SEAT BELTS –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1.5

SAFETY FIRST

B1H-160B1H-120

Protecting sseat bbeltsSeat belts which are worn properly con-tribute to the correct seating position ofthe vehicle’s occupants. The seat beltshelp reduce kinetic energy considerably.They also prevent uncontrollable move-ments which can also be the cause ofsevere injuries.Vehicle occupants who wear their seatbelts correctly benefit greatly from thefact that kinetic energy is absorbed by thebelt. The vehicle front structure and otherpassive safety measures, such as the AirBag System, also guarantee a reductionin kinetic energy. The energy created isthus kept to a low level and the risk ofinjury reduced.

Our examples describe frontal crashes.These physical principles also apply, ofcourse, to other types of accidents and tovehicles with the Air Bag System.This is why you must put on your seat beltbefore every journey, even if you are onlygoing “just around the corner”. Pleasealso ensure that your passengers are cor-rectly belted in.You have seen how seat belts function inthe case of an accident on previouspages.Accident statistics have proven that therisk of injury is reduced and the chance ofsurvival in a serious accident is increasedif the seat belt is worn properly.For this reason, the wearing of seat beltsis a legal requirement in most countries.The correct method of wearing the seatbelt, and how the Air Bag System func-tions, is described on the followingpages.

1.6 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEAT BELTS

SAFETY FIRST

B1H-123

Warning nnotes

• The bbelts sshould bbe pput oonbefore eeach jjourney –– eeven iintown ttraffic! TThis aalso aapplies ttothe rrear sseats.

• The mmaximum llevel oof pprotectionby tthe sseat bbelts ccan oonly bbeattained iif tthe bbelts aare wworn pprop-erly.

• Please eensure tthat tthe bbelts aareput oon eexactly aas ddescribed iin tthischapter.Putting tthe sseat bbelt oon uunder-neath yyour aarm, ffor eexample,would cconsiderably iincrease ttherisk oof iinjury iin tthe ccase oof aan aacci-dent!

• The bbelt mmust nnot bbe ttwisted oorcaught, nnor sshould iit bbe aallowed ttorub oon aany ssharp eedges.

• Two ppeople ((including cchildren)must nnever bbe ssecured wwith oonebelt. IIt iis pparticularly ddangerous ttobelt yyour cchild iin wwhen iit iis ssittingon yyour llap.

• The bbelt sstrap sshould nnot bbeworn oover hhard oor bbreakable aarti-cles ((glasses, bball ppens, eetc...), aasit mmay ccause iinjuries.

• Bulky aand lloose cclothing ((e.g.an oovercoat oon ttop oof aa jjacket),hinder ccorrect ffitting aand wworkingof tthe sseat bbelt.

• In oorder tto aachieve mmaximumbelt pprotection ooccupants mmustbe pproperly sseated; ccheck aalsothe ""Front sseats" cchapter.

Please ttake nnotice oof tthe wwarningnotes oon tthe nnext ppage.

SEAT BELTS –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1.7

SAFETY FIRST

B31-151C

• You mmust aalways kkeep yyour ffeetin tthe ffoot wwell dduring aa jjourney ––never oon tthe ddashboard oor oon ttheseats.

• The bbelts mmust bbe kkept cclean aasdirt mmay aaffect tthe pproper ffunction-ing oof tthe rretractors ((see ""Care aandmaintenance" cchapter).

• The sslot ffor tthe bbelt ttongue mmustnot bbe bblocked wwith ppaper oor aany-thing ssimilar, aas tthe ttongue ccanotherwise nnot eengage pproperly.

• You sshould ccheck yyour sseatbelts rregularly. IIf yyou ffind aanydamage oon tthe bbelt, bbelt cconnec-tions, rretractor oor tthe llockingpieces, tthe bbelt mmust bbe rreplacedby aa TTechnical SService CCentre.

• The sseat bbelts mmay nnot bberemoved ffrom tthe vvehicle oor mmodi-fied iin aany wway. DDo nnot aattempt ttoremove tthe sseat bbelts yyourself.

• Belts wwhich aare sstressed aandthus sstretched iin aan aaccident mmustbe rreplaced bby aa TTechnical SServiceCentre. TThe bbelt aanchorages sshouldbe cchecked.

NoteIn some export countries seat belt func-tions could differ from the 3 point or lapbelts described on the next pages

1.8 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEAT BELTS

SAFETY FIRST

How aare sseat bbelts pput oonproperly?

Putting 33 ppoint bbelt oonYou mmust aadjust tthe ffront sseat tto yyourheight bbefore ffastening tthe sseat bbelt.See ""Front sseats" cchapter.For the centre rear seat, it must be takeninto account that the back of the seatmust be perfectly locked in position forcorrect functioning of the seatbelt. Seepage 2.68.The inertia reel belt gives complete free-dom of movement when pulled slowly.Sudden braking, however, will cause thebelt to lock.The mechanism will also lock the beltwhen accelerating, driving down steepgradients or cornering.

WarningSeat bbelts ccan oonly ggive ttheir mmax-imum pprotection iin aan aaccident iifthe bbackrest iis iin aan uupright pposi-tion aand tthe bbelt iis ffitted cclosely ttothe bbody.

• Pull belt by the tongue slowly andsmoothly across the chest and hips.

• Push the tongue into the locking part ofthe seat until it engages audibly (pull ttotest!).

WarningThe ttongue mmust bbe ppressed iintolocking ppart ddesignated ffor tthatseat aand sseat bbelt. TThe pprotectiveeffect oof tthe bbelt wwill ootherwise bbenegatively aaffected aand tthe rrisk oofinjury iincreases!

SEAT BELTS –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1.9

SAFETY FIRST

B1H-127

WarningThe sshoulder ppart oof tthe bbelt mmustrun rroughly aacross tthe ccentre oofthe sshoulder, oon nno aaccountagainst tthe nneck aand mmust aalso bbefirmly iin ccontact wwith tthe bbody.The llap ppart oof tthe bbelt mmust ffittightly aacross tthe ppelvis– nnotacross tthe sstomach. IIf nnecessary,pull tthe bbelt ttight.

Warning

• Please eensure tthat tthe sseat bbeltis ffitted pproperly. AA sseat bbelt wwhichis wworn iincorrectly ccould aalsocause iinjury iin aan aaccident.

• A sseat bbelt wwhich iis wworn ttooloosely ccould ccause iinjury aas yyourkinetic eenergy wwill tthrow yyour bbodyfurther fforward iin aan aaccident aandit wwill bbe ccaught aabruptly bby ttheseat bbelt.

1.10 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEAT BELTS

SAFETY FIRST

B31-119CB31-167C

With the aid of the belt hheight aadjust-ment the routing of the shoulder belt forthe front and rear seats can be set to fitthe body properly.

• To adjust, push the upper relay fittingin the direction shown, hold in this posi-tion and move up or down so that theshoulder part of belt runs roughly acrossthe centre of the shoulder as shown in theleft-hand illustration – on nno aaccountagainst tthe nneck.

• After adjusting, pull the belt with a jerkto ensure that the relay fitting is properlyengaged.

NoteThe seat height adjustment* can also beused to adjust belt routing on front seats.

WarningPregnant wwomen sshould aalwayswear aa sseat bbelt ttoo. TThe llap ppartof tthe bbelt sshould bbe aas llow aaspossible aacross tthe ppelvis sso tthatno ppressure iis eexerted oon ttheabdomen.

SEAT BELTS ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1.11

SAFETY FIRST

B1H-131TO8-052

Taking tthree ppoint bbelt ooffTo release the belt, press the red button inthe lock. The tongue will then spring out.Pass the tongue towards the door by handso that the retractor can roll the belt upproperly. A plastic knob in the belt holdsthe tongue in a convenient position.

Lap bbelt*The centre place on the rear seat is fittedwith a lap belt.The belt lock is used in the same way ason the three point inertia reel belts.For safety reasons a lap belt not beingused should always be connected to thebuckle.

Warning

• The llap ppart oof tthe bbelt mmust ffittightly aacross tthe ppelvis– nnotacross tthe sstomach. IIf nnecessary,loosen tthe bbelt.

• Pregnant wwomen sshould aalwayswear sseat bbelts ttoo. TThe llap ppart oofthe bbelt sshould bbe aas llow aas ppossi-ble aacross tthe ppelvis sso tthat nnopressure iis eexerted oon ttheabdomen.

1.12 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEAT BELTS

SAFETY FIRST

B1H-133B1H-132

To llengthen belt hold the tongue at rightangles to belt and pull belt through to therequired length – see illustrations.The belt is easier to adjust if tongue andcap are pressed together.

To sshorten belt it is only necessary topull the free end of belt.The surplus belt length is taken up bymoving the plastic slide.

SEAT BELTS ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1.13

SAFETY FIRST

B1H-134B1H-135

Belt ttensioner*Safety for the belted-in driver and frontpassenger is increased by the belt ten-sioners fitted to the inertia reels of thefront 3 point seatbelts to supplement theAir Bag.In case of a severe frontal collision thesystem is activated by sensors which firea pyrotechnic charge in the two automatictightening devices.This makes the devices roll up and tightenthe tensioners.

Warning

• Any rrepair wwork oon tthe ttensionersystem oor tthe rremoval oor iinstalla-tion oof ssystem ccomponents fforother rrepair wwork sshould bbe ccar-ried oout bby aa TTechnical SServiceCentre.

• The pprotective ffunction oof tthebelt ttensioner iis ccapable oof ooper-ating oonly oonce. IIf tthe bbelt tten-sioners hhave bbeen aactivated aat aanytime, tthe ssystem mmust bbe rrenewed.If yyou ssell tthe vvehicle, pplease ppasson tthis MManual tto tthe nnew oowner.

Notes

• Smoke is released when the tensionersare activated. This smoke does not indi-cate a fire in the vehicle.

• It is of utmost importance to observethe relevant safety regulations when thevehicle or components of the system arescrapped. Technical Service Centres arefamiliar with these regulations.

1.14 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEAT BELTS

SAFETY FIRST

Attach cchild sseat

WarningA cchild sseat iin wwhich tthe cchild ssitswith iits bback tto tthe ddirection ooftravel mmay oonly bbe uused iif tthe ppas-senger sside AAir BBag hhas bbeendeactivated bby aa TTechnical SServiceCentre. OOtherwise tthe cchild wwouldbe iin ggreat ddanger.Ask yyour TTechnical SService CCentreabout tthe cconversion.

As ssoon aas tthe cchild sseat iis nno llongerneeded, tthe ppassenger sside AAir BBagshould bbe mmade ooperational aagain bbya TTechnical SService CCentre.

Child sseat ssafety llock*The tthree ppoint ssafety bbelt* iin tthemiddle oof tthe rrear oof ssome mmodel vver-sions sseat mmay bbe bblocked ccon-stantly. TThis eensures tthat tthe cchildseat iis pproperly ffixed iin tthe ccar.

Activating cchild sseat bbelt llock*

• Secure your child seat with the belt fol-lowing the instructions given by the man-ufacturer.

• Pull out the shoulder part of the beltfully.

• Roll the belt back in until it lies tightlyagainst the child seat. A “clicking” noisewill be heard when the belt is rolling in.The belt can now no longer be pulled out– pull tto ttest!

Deactivating cchild sseat bbelt llock*Press the red button in the lock part. Thetongue will be released from the lockingpart. The child seat belt lock is automati-cally deactivated when the belt is fullyrolled up.

SEAT BELTS ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1.15

SAFETY FIRST

1.16 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– AIR BAG

SAFETY FIRST

Supplementing tthe tthree-point sseatbelts, tthe AAir BBag ssystem offers addi-tional protection for the driver’s and pas-senger’s head and chest in a seriousfrontal collision.In serious lateral collisions the side AirBags reduce the risk of injury to the bodyparts exposed to the danger for the frontseat occupants.The Air Bag system is not a replacementfor the seat belt, but it is rather one partof the passive safety concept of the vehi-cle. Please note that the best possibleprotection to be offered by the Air Bagsystem can only be effective when theseat belts are fastened.Therefore, tthe sseat bbelts sshouldalways bbe uused, nnot oonly ffor rreasonsof sstatutory rregulations, bbut aalso fforsafety.Also bbear iin mmind tthe iinstructionsfrom tthe ""Seat bbelts" cchapter.

1) This equipment may vary according to thecountry.

The driver’s ffront AAir BBag is located inthe central cushioned part of the steeringwheel.The passenger’s ffront AAir BBag islocated in the dash panel above the glovecompartment.Both are marked with "AIR BAG".

WarningThe sseat bbelts aand AAir BBag ssystemonly ooffer mmaximum pprotectionwhen sseated ccorrectly.

Air BBag ssystem1)

TO8-051LEO-000

SAFETY FIRST

AIR BAG ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1.17

The side AAir BBags are located on thebackside of the front seats (see figure)and are marked with "AIR BAG" on theupper part of the back.

Components oof tthe ssystemThe system basically consists of:

• an electronic control and monitoringunit (control unit)

• two front Air Bags

• two side Air Bags

• a warning lamp in the instrument panel.

Air BBag ffunctions aare ccontrolled eelec-tronically:

• Each time that the ignition is turned on,the Air Bag warning light will light forabout 3 seconds.

• If at least one of the Air Bag devices isdeactivated, the warning light will flashfor approx. 12 seconds.There iis aa ddefect iin tthe ssystem iif

• When switching on the ignition thewarning lamp does not light.

• Following the connection of the igni-tion, the warning light will not go off untilafter approx. 3 seconds.

• After the ignition is switched on thewarning lamp goes out and comes backon.

• The warning lamp lights or flasheswhile driving.

WarningWhen aa ddefect iis ppresent tthe ssys-tem nneeds tto bbe cchecked iimmedi-ately bby aa TTechnical SServiceCentre. FFailure tto ddo sso wwill jjeopar-dise pproper ffunctioning oof tthe AAirBag iin tthe ccase oof aan aaccident.

B1H-209

When aare tthe AAir BBags aactivated?The Air Bag system is designed so thatthe driver’s side Air Bag and Passenger’sside Air Bag are triggered in case of aserious ffrontal ccollision.In a serious sside-on ccollision, the cor-responding side1) Air Bag is triggered.In ccertain kkinds oof aaccidents, bboth tthefront aand tthe sside1) Air BBags ccould bbetriggered.The Air Bag system will nnot bbe ttriggeredin case of light frontal and lateral colli-sions, rear collisions and overturning. Inthese cases, the vehicles occupants areprotected in the conventional way by theseat belts. It is not possible to define globally whenexactly the Air Bag system will be trig-gered given that the circumstances ofeach impact may vary enormously.During inflation, the Air Bag emits a finedust. This is quite normal and there is nofire risk.


Frontal AAir BBag1)

When the system is triggered, the bagsare inflated by gas opening in front of thedriver and passenger.The Air Bag inflation is considerably rapidand takes fractions of a second, to offerthe best protection in the case of an acci-dent.Information aabout tthe ooperation aandpossible ffaults oof tthe ssystem mmay bbefound oon tthe pprevious ppage.

Please ttake nnotice oof tthe wwarningnotes oon tthe nnext ppage

1.18 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– AIR BAG

SAFETY FIRST

B1H-194

AIR BAG ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1.19

SAFETY FIRST

Warning nnotes

• It iis iimportant tto mmaintain aa ddis-tance oof aat lleast 225 ccm ffrom tthesteering wwheel oor iinstrumentpanel sso tthat tthe ffront sseat ooccu-pants hhave tthe bbest ppossibleeffective pprotection iif tthe ssystemis ttriggered. TThe ffront sseats mmustalways bbe ccorrectly aadjusted tto tthebody hheight.

• If yyou aare nnot wwearing aa sseat bbeltor llean fforward wwhilst ddriving oorare ssitting iin tthe wwrong pposition,you aare oopen tto aa hhigher rrisk oofinjury iin aan aaccident wwhen tthe AAirBag SSystem iinflates.

• Children mmust nnever bbe aallowed ttosit uunsecured oon tthe ffront sseatwhilst tthe vvehicle iis iin mmotion. IIf ttheAir BBag SSystem iis ttriggered dduringan aaccident, cchildren ccould bbe sseri-ously iinjured oor kkilled. FFor ffurtherimportant ppoints pplease rrefer tto tthechapter oon ““Safety ffor cchildren”.

• No ppersons, aanimals oor oobjectsshould bbe llocated bbetween tthefront-seat ooccupants aand tthe eeffec-tive rrange oof tthe AAir BBags.

• The pprotective ffunction oof tthe AAirBag wwill oonly bbe ttriggered ffor ooneaccident. IIf tthe AAir BBag hhas bbeentriggered, tthe ssystem mmust bbereplaced.

• The ssteering wwheel ppadded pplateand tthe ppadded ssurface oof tthe AAirBag mmodule oon tthe ppassenger ssideof ddash ppanel mmust nnot hhave sstickersattached, nnor sshould tthey bbe ccov-ered oor rre-worked iin aany oother wway.These pparts sshould oonly bbe ccleanedwith aa ddry ccloth oor aa ccloth mmoistenedwith wwater. No oother iitems ssuch aas,for eexample, ttelephone oor ccupholders sshould bbe aattached tto ttheAir BBag mmodule.

• No mmodifications oof aany kkindmay bbe uundertaken oon tthe pparts oofthe AAir BBag SSystem. AAll wwork oon ttheAir BBag ssystem, iincluding ttheremoval aand iinstallation oof ssystemparts dduring oother rrepair wwork ((ex.:removing ssteering wwheel), sshouldonly bbe ccarried oout bby aa TTechnicalService CCentre.

NoteIf the vehicle or individual parts of the AirBag system is scrapped, one must alwaysobserve the relevant valid safety regula-tions. Technical Service Centres are famil-iar with these regulations.

Side AAir BBag1)

When the system is triggered, the bagsinflate using gas.The Air Bag inflates in a split second to beable to offer additional protection duringan accident.On ppage 11.17 yyou wwill ffind nnotes oonthe ffunction aand ppossible ddefects iinthe ssystem.


Warning nnotes

Warning

• Any rrepairs tto tthe sside AAir BBag,such aas tthe rremoval oor aassemblyof aany ssystem ccomponent iin ccon-nection wwith aany oother rrepair wwork(e.g. rremoving tthe ffront sseat),should oonly bbe pperformed bby aaTechnical SService CCentre. TThe ccor-rect ffunctioning oof tthe AAir BBag ssys-tem ccould ootherwise bbe aadverselyaffected.

• If tthe sseatbelt iis nnot wworn oor aanincorrect sseating pposition iisadapted ((for eexample lleaning ttoone sside) dduring aa vvoyage, tthere iisa hhigher rrisk oof iinjury ddue tto tthedeployment oof tthe AAir BBag iin tthecase oof aan aaccident.

• To gguarantee aa mmaximum oof ppro-tection ffrom tthe llateral AAir BBag, aacorrect sseating pposition sshould bbeadapted aand tthe sseatbelt sshouldalways bbe wworn.

• There sshould bbe nno pperson, aani-mal oor oobject bbetween tthe ffrontpassengers aand tthe aaction zzone oofthe AAir BBag. AAlso, nno aaccessory oorany oother oobject sshould bbeinstalled iin tthe ddeployment aareaof tthe llateral AAir BBag tthat mmayimpede iits ooperation oor eevencause iinjury tto tthe ooccupants oofthe vvehicle.

Please ttake nnotice oof tthe wwarningnotes oon tthe nnext ppage.

1.20 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– AIR BAG

SAFETY FIRST

B1H-210

AIR BAG ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1.21

SAFETY FIRST

• Only llight aarticles oof cclothingshould bbe hhung oon tthe ccoat hhooks.No hheavy oor ssharp-edged iitemsshould bbe lleft iin tthe ppockets.

• No eexcessive ppressure sshouldbe aapplied tto tthe ssides oof tthebackrest, nnor sshould tthey bbe ssub-jected tto uundue ppushing oor sshov-ing eetc. aas tthe ssystem ccould bbedamaged aas aa rresult. TThe sside AAirBags wwould nnot bbe ttriggeredshould tthis hhappen!

• Do nnot ffit sseat ccovers oon tthe ddri-ver’s oor ppassenger sseat. OOther-wise, tthe ffunctioning oof tthe ssideAir BBag ccould bbe llimited ssince iitcould nnot ccome oout oof tthe sseatback. FFor ffurther nnotes rrefer tto tthechapter ““Accessories, mmodifica-tions aand rreplacement oof pparts”.

• Any ddamage tto tthe ooriginal sseatcovers oor tto tthe sseam iin tthe mmod-ule aarea oof tthe sside AAir BBag mmustbe rrepaired aas ssoon aas ppossible bbyany TTechnical SService CCentre.

• The pprotective ffunction oof tthe AAirBag wwill oonly bbe ttriggered ffor ooneaccident. IIf tthe AAir BBag hhas bbeentriggered, tthe ssystem mmust bbereplaced.

• If cchildren aare lleaning tto ooneside oor aadapt aan iincorrect ppositionduring aa vvoyage, tthey aare aauto-matically eexposed tto aa hhigher rriskof iinjury iin tthe eevent oof aan aacci-dent eespecially iif tthey aare sseatedin tthe ppassenger sseat. TThey mmaybe sseriously iinjured oor eeven kkilledas aa rresult.

1.22 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– AIR BAG

SAFETY FIRST

Deactivate AAir BBagsAir BBags mmust nnot bbe ddeactivatedunless tthere aare sspecific rreasons ttodo sso, ssuch aas:

• in the exceptional ccase where it maybecome necessary to use a child seat inthe passenger seat, where the child is fac-ing backwards.

• if it is not possible to keep a minimumdistance of 25 cm between the center ofthe steering wheel and the breastboneeven though the driver’s seat is in the cor-rect position.

• if handicapped people need specialequipment in the steering wheel area.

• if special seats are fitted (i.e. orthope-dic seats without side Air Bags).See the Technical Services for informationabout which Air Bags may be deactivatedin your vehicle.If you yourself disconnect the passengerAir Bag using the key llock sswitch1) (fol-lowing page), an “AIR BBAG OOFF” warninglight will constantly remind you that theAir Bag is deactivated.Always aactivate tthe AAir BBags wwhenpossible, tto pprotect tthe ooccupants oofthe vvehicle iin ccase oof aa ccollision.

1) This equipment will vary according to the coun-try.

Deactivation oof tthe ppassenger AAirBag ffor tthe iinstallation oof aa cchildseatIn the exceptional case where it maybecome necessary to use a child seat inthe passenger seat, where the child is fac-ing backwards, it is essential to deacti-vate the passenger Air Bag.We still recommend the installation of thechild seat uniquely oon tthe rrear ppassen-ger sseat, and to avoid the need to deac-tivate the passenger Air Bag.If uuse oof tthe cchild sseat hhas cceased,the ppassenger AAir BBag mmust bbe rrecon-nected.Before tthe uuse oof cchild sseats, ppleaseread ccarefully tthe ssection oon ""Safetyfor cchildren".

Warning!If iin aan eexceptional ccase wwhereyou mmay wwish tto iinstall aa cchild sseatin tthe ppassenger sseat, wwhere tthechild iis ffacing bbackwards, iit iisessential tto ddeactivate tthe ppas-senger AAir BBag. TTo nnot ddo sso wwillput tthe cchild aat rrisk oof sserious ooreven ffatal iinjury. FFor aany ddoubtabout tthe ddeactivation oof tthe ppas-senger AAir BBag, cconsult ttheTechnical SService.

Key llock sswitch1) for ddeactivationof ppassenger AAir BBagsBy using the key lock switch in the glovebox it is possible to deactivate and acti-vate the frontal and lateral passenger AirBags. This measure is necessary in the excep-tional cases where a child seat must beinstalled in the passenger seat. In general, child seats should oonly bbefitted iin tthe rrear sseats oof tthe vvehicle.Reactivate tthe AAir BBags aas ssoon aaspossible, tthe pprompt rreactivation oofthe AAir BBags wwill ooffer nnecessary ppro-tection.

Warning!The kkey llock sswitch sshould oonly bbeused wwith tthe iignition iin tthe ooffposition. IIf nnot, ffaults mmay bbeintroduced iinto tthe ssystem ppre-venting tthe ttriggering oof tthe AAirBag oor eeven aan uunwanted ddeploy-ment.

1) This equipment may change from one countryto another.

Deactivation

• Turn the ignition to the off position

• Turn the key lock switch to the “OFF”position using the ignition key.

• Ensure that when the ignition isswitched to the “ON” position, the “AIRBAG OOFF” warning light always comeson.

Warning!The ddriver oof tthe vvehicle hhas ttheresponsibility oof eensuring tthe ccor-rect pposition oof tthe sswitch.

AIR BAG ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1.23

SAFETY FIRST

Activation

• Turn the ignition to the off position

• Turn the key lock switch to the “ON”position using the ignition key.

• Ensure that when the ignition isswitched on, the “AIR BBAG OOFF” warninglight does not come on.

“AIR BBAG OOFF” wwarning llight (Air BBag ddeactivated)This warning light will light when the igni-tion is turned on as long as the passengerAir Bags are deactivated.The wwarning llight wwill fflash iin ccase oofany aanomaly iin tthe AAir BBag. IIn tthiscase aa TTechnical SService mmust bbe vvis-ited.

Warning!If tthe ““AIR BBAG OOFF” wwarning llightflashes:

• There iis nno gguarantee tthat tthepassenger AAir BBags wwill bbe ttrig-gered iin tthe eevent oof aan aaccident.Warn aall ppassengers.

• Do nnot pplace aany cchild sseats iinthe ppassenger sseat, iin tthe eevent oofan aaccident tthe AAir BBag mmay bbetriggered ccausing sserious iinjury.

1.24 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––AIR BAG

SAFETY FIRST

LO3-002

SAFETY FOR CHILDREN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––1.25

SAFETY FIRST

Safety ffor cchildren

It iis cclearly ddemonstrated bby aaccidentstatistics tthat ggenerally cchildren aaresafer oon tthe bback sseat tthan oon tthepassenger’s sseat. TTherefore, cchildrenunder 112 yyears oof aage mmust nnormallytravel oon tthe rrear sseats1). DDependingon aage, hheight aand wweight, tthey hhaveto uuse aa ssuitable cchild rrestraint ssys-tem oor aa sseat bbelt. FFor ssafety rreasons,the cchild sseat mmust bbe ffit iin tthe ccenterof tthe rrear sseat oor bbehind tthe ppassen-ger’s sseat.The pphysical pprinciples aapparent iinan aaccident, wwhich aare ddetailed oonpages 11.3 tto 11.5, nnaturally aalso aapplyto cchildren.As oopposed tto aadults, tthe mmuscle aandbone sstructures oof cchildren aare nnotyet ffully fformed. AAs ssuch, cchildren aaresubject tto aa hhigher rrisk oof iinjury.In oorder tto rreduce tthis rrisk oof iinjury,children mmay oonly bbe ttransported iinspecial cchild rrestraint ssystems!

Warning

• All vvehicle ooccupants, aand ppar-ticularly cchildren, mmust bbe bbeltedin dduring tthe jjourney.

• You sshould nnever aallow yyourchild tto sstand oor kkneel wwhilst tthevehicle iis iin mmotion. SShould aanaccident ooccur ,, yyour cchildren wwillbe tthrown oout oof tthe vvehicle aandcould bbe sseriously iinjured.

1) Different norms may apply to different coun-tries.

• If cchildren llean wwhilst tthe vvehi-cle iis iin mmotion oor aadopt aan iincor-rect ssitting pposition, tthey aare ssub-jected tto aan iincreased rrisk oofinjury. TThis aapplies iin pparticular ttochildren sseated oon tthe ppassengerseat wwhen tthe AAir BBag ssystem iistriggered dduring aan aaccident. TThiscould ccause sserious oor ffatalinjuries.

• A ssuitable cchild rrestraint ssystemcan pprotect yyour cchild!

• Do nnot lleave yyour cchild uunat-tended iin tthe cchild sseat

• Children uunder 11.50 mm ((approx.under 112 yyears oof aage) mmust nnotuse nnormal sseat bbelts wwithout tthechild rrestraint ssystem. TThis ccouldcause iinjury tto tthe sstomach aandneck.

1.26 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––SAFETY FOR CHILDREN

SAFETY FIRST

U – Adequate for the universal retentionsystems officially authorized withthis age group. (Universal retentionsystems are those fixed by the adultsafety belt).

UF – Adequate for the universal retentionsystems oriented frontwards offi-cialy authorized for use in this agegroup.

L – Adequate for retention systems withISOFIX anchoring.

X – Seat space not adequate for childrenof this age group.

Number oof sseats Approximate Front BBack Central

age ggroup passenger sides rear

Group 00 < 10 kg U U(0-9 months)

Group 00 ++ < 13 kg U U(0-24 months)

Group II 9-18 kg U/L U(9-48 months)

Group III/III 15-36 kg X UF UF(4-12 years)

U (only in exceptionalcases). (Slide the front passenger seat as far backas possible and

always disconnectthe Air Bag)





SAFETY FOR CHILDREN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––1.27

SAFETY FIRST

NoteChild rrestraint ssystems ttested aaccord-ing tto EECE-R 444.03 sstandard aareclearly mmarked wwith tthe EECE-R 444.03test mmark ((capital EE iin aa ccircle aand aanumber wwhich iindicates tthe ccountryof tthe nnorm, ii.e. SSpain iis nnumber 99).Only officially approved child restraintsystems which are suitable for the childshould be used.The ECE-R1) 44.03 standard applies tochild restraint systems. This categorizesrestraint systems into four classes.Group 0: 0-10 kgGroup 0+: 0-13 kgGroup I: 9-18 kgGroup II: 15-25 kgGroup III: 22-36 kg

1) Regulation of the Economic Commission of Eu-rope.

Group 00/0+For babies up to 10 kg/13 kg we recom-mend child seats which can be adjustedto the horizontal position (see illustra-tion).

WarningIf iin aan eexceptional ccase, aa cchildseat iis ffitted iin tthe ppassenger sseatwhere tthe cchild iis ttravelling wwiththe bback tto tthe ddirection oof ttravel,the ppassenger AAir BBag mmust bbedeactivated eeither bby aa TTechnicalService CCentre. OOtherwise tthere iisa ddanger oof ssevere oor eeven ffatalinjuries. SSee aa TTechnical SServiceCentre tto ddeactivate tthe ssystem.

As ssoon aas tthe cchild sseat iis nno llongerneeded aas ddescribed iin tthe aaboveparagraph, tthe ppassenger-side AAirBag sshould bbe mmade ooperationalagain bby aa TTechnical SService CCentre.

IBN-110

Group IIFor babies and small children weighingbetween 9-18 kg. Best suited are childseats with safety board – see illustration– or child seats in which the child facesbackwards.

WarningIf iin aan eexceptional ccase, aa cchildseat iis ffitted iin tthe ppassenger sseatwhere tthe cchild iis ttravelling wwiththe bback tto tthe ddirection oof ttravel,the ppassenger AAir BBag mmust bbedeactivated eeither bby aa TTechnicalService CCentre. OOtherwise tthere iisa ddanger oof ssevere oor eeven ffatalinjuries. SSee aa TTechnical SServiceCentre tto ddeactivate tthe ssystem.


Group IIIFor children weighing between 15-25 kg.Best suited are child seats combined with3-point safety belts.

WarningThe sshoulder ppart oof tthe bbelt mmustrun rroughly aacross tthe ccentre oof ttheshoulder, oon nno aaccount aagainstthe nneck, aand mmust bbe ffirmly iincontact wwith tthe bbody.The llap ppart oof tthe bbelt mmust ffittightly aacross tthe ppelvis– nnotacross tthe sstomach. IIf nnecessary,pull tthe bbelt ttight.

B1S-003PB1S-002P

1.28 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SAFETY FOR CHILDREN

SAFETY FIRST

SAFETY FOR CHILDREN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1.29

SAFETY FIRST

Group IIIIFor children weighing between 22-36 kg.and less than 1.50 m (5’) tall. Best suitedare seat cushions combined with the 3-point seat belt.

WarningThe sshoulder ppart oof tthe bbelt mmustrun rroughly aacross tthe ccentre oofthe sshoulder, oon nno aaccountagainst tthe nneck, aand mmust bbefirmly iin ccontact wwith tthe bbody.The llap ppart oof tthe bbelt mmust ffittightly aacross tthe cchild’s hhips– nnotacross tthe sstomach. IIf nnecessary,pull tthe bbelt ttight.

Children more than 1.50 m/5’ tall can usethe seat belts fitted without seat cush-ions.

WarningNever, uunder aany ccircumstances,should yyou ttransport cchildren oorinfants iin tthe vvehicle, bby ccarryingthem iin aarms oor sseated oon ssome-body’s llap.

When using the belt, the section “Seatbelts” should also be noted.

B1S-005PB1S-004P

1.30 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SAFETY FOR CHILDREN

SAFETY FIRST

Notes

• Child retention systems designed for allages are available for your vehicle fromthe SEAT Original Accessories Programunder the name "Peke"1). These systemsmentioned above have been especiallydesigned and approved conforming to theECE-R 44.03 regulation.

• For tthe iinstallation aand uuse, aatten-tion mmust bbe ppaid tto sstatutory rregula-tions aand tthe iinstructions oof ttherestraint ssystem mmanufacturer.

Warning

• Particular ccare iis rrequired iifchild rrestraint ssystems aare uusedwhich aare bbolted ttogether wwith ttheseat bbelts ffitted iin tthe vvehicle. TThebolts mmust bbe sscrewed iinto tthehole ffor tthe ccomplete llength aandtightened tto 440 NNm.

• Furthermore, tthe sseat bbelts mmustbe cchecked ffor ccorrect rrouting. TThebelt mmust nnot bbe aable tto bbe ddam-aged bby ssharply eedged ffittings.

• Only oone cchild pper cchild rrestraintsystem iis aallowed.

1) Not available in all countries.

Attach cchild sseat

Securing tthe cchild sseat*To attach the child seat you can perma-nently block the automatic three-pointseatbelt* of the rear central seat availablein certain vehicle versions. Hence, a cor-rect attachment of the child seat in thevehicle is guaranteed.

WarningIf, iin eexceptional ccases, yyou mmustcarry aa cchild sseat iin tthe ppassengerseat wwhere tthe cchild ssits wwith iitsback tto tthe ddirection oof ttravel, tthepassenger AAir BBag mmust bbe ddeacti-vated bby aa TTechnical SServiceCentre. OOtherwise, sserious iinjuriesor lloss oof llife ccould ooccur. IIf yyouwish tto ddisconnect tthe ssystem,contact aa TTechnical SServiceCentre.


SAFETY FOR CHILDREN –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1.31

SAFETY FIRST

Attaching cchild sseats wwith ttheISOFIX ssystemThere are four attachment rings (seearrows) on the body work between thechassis and the cushions of the rear seat.You can use these rings to attach a maxi-mum of two child seats with the ISOFIXsystem. When you fit the child seat youmust be able to hear a "click" on bothsides (sound of anchoring). Then, pull theseat to check whether it has been fittedproperly (pull test!)

WarningFor ssafety rreasons, ccarefully rreadthe iinstructions oof cchild sseats wwiththe IISOFIX ssystem aand tthe ""Safetyfor cchildren" cchapter.

B1J-095D

1.32 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEATS AND HEAD RESTRAINTS

SAFETY FIRST

Front sseats

The correct adjustment of the seats isimportant for:– reaching the controls safely and quickly.– relaxed low-fatigue body position.– maximum pprotection ffrom tthe sseat

belts aand tthe AAir BBag SSystem.

Warning

• It iis iimportant tto mmaintain aa ddis-tance oof aat lleast 225 ccm ffrom tthesteering wwheel oor iinstrumentpanel sso tthat tthe ffront sseat ooccu-pants hhave tthe bbest ppossibleeffective pprotection iif tthe ssystemis ttriggered. IIn aaddition, tthe ffrontseats aand tthe hhead rrestraints mmustbe aadjusted tto tthe bbody hheight.

Consult the "Front seats" chapter for seatadjustment. Also note on this page thebasic adjustment of the driver’s and pas-senger seats.

WarningNo iitems mmust bbe kkept iin tthefootwell, aas tthese ccould bblock tthepedals iin ccase oof ssudden bbraking.Consequently, iit wwould bbe iimpos-sible tto bbrake, cchange ggear ooraccelerate.Feet sshould rremain iin tthe ffootwellwhen tthe vvehicle iis mmoving, nneverresting oon tthe iinstrument ppanel oorseats.

Driver’s sseatWe recommend that you position the dri-ver’s seat as follows:– Set the driver’s seat forwards/back-

wards in such a way that the pedals canbe fully depressed with a slightlyangled leg.

– Set the backrest in such a way that it isfully against your back and that you canreach the upper point of the steeringwheel with your arms at a slight angle.

Front ppassenger sseatWe recommend that you position the frontpassenger seat as follows:– Backrest in an upright position.– Place the feet in the footwell in a com-

fortable position.– At the same time push the seat back as

far as possible.

B1S-016P

SEATS AND HEAD RESTRAINTS –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 1.33

SAFETY FIRST

Head rrestraints*

The head restraints are height adjustableand must be set to suit the size of theoccupant. Correctly adjusted headrestraints together with the seat beltsoffer effective protection. It is also possi-ble to set the angle of the front headrestraints.

Adjusting hheight

• Grip sides of head restraint with bothhands and pull up or push down.

• The best protection is obtained whenthe upper edge of the restraint is at lleastat eye level or higher.

B1S-017P

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5

Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13

OPENING AND CLOSING

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23

Keys with remote control* . . . . . 2.24

Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . 2.25

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26

Central locking* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32

Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . 2.33

Radio-frequency remote control key* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36

Electric windows* . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39

Sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . 2.43

LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY

Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48

Indicators and dipped beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50

Windscreen wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53

Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54

SEATS AND LUGGAGECOMPARTMENT

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57

Head restraints* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.61

Armrest* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62

Heated seats* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.63

Adjustable steering column* . . . 2.63

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . 2.64

Rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.66

Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.67

Roof rack*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.69

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.71

Cigarette lighter/electric socket . 2.72

Stowage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72

Drink can holder* . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73

CLIMATE CONTROL

Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . 2.74

Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.77

Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.84

DRIVING

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89

Automatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . 2.89

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.95

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.96

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 2.97

Stopping the engine. . . . . . . . . . 2.99

Cruise control system* . . . . . . . 2.100

HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––2.1

INDEX

2.2 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––INSTRUMENT PANEL

HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS

Table

INSTRUMENT PANEL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––2.3


LEO-001A

Position Page1 – Door handle ........................... 2.262 – Knurled wheel for instrument

lighting*................................. 2.463 – Knurled wheel for light range

adjustment* ........................... 2.464 – Light switch ............................ 2.455 – Air vents................ 2.74/2.79/2.846 – Indicator/dipped beam lever... 2.497 – Heated rear window switch ..... 2.468 – Hazard warning light switch .... 2.479 – Knurled wheel for left

seat heating*/Drink can holder ..............2.63/2.73

10 – Knurled wheel for rightseat heating*/Drink can holder ..............2.63/2.73

11 – Passenger Air Bag* ................. 1.1612 – Glove compartment/

stowage box ........................... 2.7213 – Stowage box........................... 2.7214 – Radio/Radio housing1)*

Radio navigation system1)* ..... 3.8315 – Controls for:

– Heating/ventilation ............. 2.75– Air conditioning* ................. 2.78– Climatronic* ........................ 2.85

16 – Automatic*/Manual gear lever .. 2.8917 – Ashtray/ lighter.............. 2.71/2.7218 – Pedals .................................... 2.6419 – Windshield washer/wipers

lever/Multifunction indicator* ........................ 2.51/2.8

Position Page20 – Steering and ignition lock ..... 2.9621 – Driver’s Air Bag/Horn.............. 1.1622 – Steering column adjustment

lever* ..................................... 2.6323 – On board literature

compartment .......................... 2.7324 – Instrument and warning lamps

panel ..................................... 2.1325 – Bonnet release lever ............... 3.3426 – Electric wing mirror

adjustment lever* ................... 2.5427 – Central locking button* ........... 2.2928 – Electric window controls* ....... 2.39

• Some of the equipment above-men-tioned is only installed on certain modelversions or comes as an option.

• Controls on right hand drive modelsmay slightly vary from left-hand drive ver-sions. Nevertheless both versions are fit-ted with the very same indicator signs.

1) An additional instructions manual is deliveredfor vehicles with a navigation system or factory-fitted radio. If the radio is subsequently fitted,follow indications in the "Accessories, modifi-cations and replacement of parts" chapter.


2.4 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.5


Instruments

In some model versions or in certaincountries, it is possible to insert the igni-tion key and have the dash panel lightsgo on without switching the engine on.This function is independent of the vehi-cle's light connections.The arrangement of the instrumentsdepends on the model and the engine fit-ted.

Page1 – Revolutions counter* .................. 2.52 – Coolant temperature ................... 2.63 – Fuel gauge.................................. 2.74 – Speedometer .............................. 2.75 – Digital clock*...............................2.7

Outside temperature indicator*.....2.7Multifunction indicator* ..............2.8

6 – Selector lever position display*. 2.117 – Mileage clock with Service

interval indicator* ............ 2.11/2.12

1 –– RRevolutions ccounter*On nno aaccount mmust tthe rrevolutionscounter nneedle mmove iinto tthe rredzone oof tthe sscale.

❀Changing uup iin ggood ttime hhelpsto ssave ffuel aand kkeep tthe nnoise

down.Change down a gear at the latest whenthe engine turn over is no longer smooth.Avoid high engine revolutions during therunning-in period.

LEO-002

2 –– CCoolant ttemperatureThe gauge starts to work when the igni-tion is switched on.When the ignition is switched on thewarning lamp (c) flashes for a few sec-onds as a functional check.

a –– CColdAvoid high engine speeds and do notwork engine too hard yet.

b –– NNormalWhen the vehicle is driven normally theneedle should settle down in the centralzone.When engine is working hard and theambient temperature is high, the needlemay move a long way up.This iis nnot sserious aas llong aas tthewarning llamp ((c) ddoes nnot fflash.

c –– WWarning llampIf the lamp flashes and a tone is heard atthe same time when driving, first checkthe coolant temperature being displayed.If the needle is in the normal zone,coolant should be added as soon as pos-sible. See the chapter on “Cooling sys-tem”.

If the needle is in the right half of the indi-cator, the coolant temperature is too high.In tthis ccase, ppull oover, sswitch ttheengine ooff, wwait uuntil iit ccools and thenlook for the cause of the problem. See thechapter on “Cooling system”.

WarningNote wwarnings iin ""Cooling ssystem"chapter.

Additional llights iin ffront oof tthe ccool-ing aair iintake iinterfere wwith tthe fflowof ccooling aair. AAt hhigh aambient ttem-peratures aand ffull tthrottle tthere iis aadanger tthat tthe eengine wwill tthen oover-heat.

2.6 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INSTRUMENT PANEL


IB9-035



3 –– FFuel ggaugeWhen the ignition is switched on, thewarning light lights up as a functionalcheck.The tank holds about 55 litres.When the needle moves to the red reservezone, warning light d lights up at thesame time that an acoustic warning signalis produced; this means that approxi-mately 7 litres of fuel remain.

4 –– SSpeedometerThe speedometer is fitted with a digitalmileage clock and a trip mileage clock, aswell as a service interval indicator*.During the running in period you mustnote the instructions in the chapter "Thefirst 1,500 km – and afterwards".

5 –– DDigital cclock*The digital clock is set by turning a knobthat is on the bottom right next to thespeedometer.

• The hours are set by turning the buttonanti-clockwise until it stops. By turningthe knob once, you move forward onehour. By turning and holding the knob,the hours move forward continuously.

• The minutes are set by turning the but-ton clockwise until it stops. By turning theknob once, you move forward one minute.By turning and holding the knob, the min-utes move forward continuously.The knob can be used to set the clock tothe exact second.

• Turn the knob to the right until the timeis set to exactly one minute before therequired time.

• Turn the button to the right just as theseconds indicator of an accurately setclock shows one full minute.

• Turning the button to the left sets theclock to the required arrow.

5 –– OOutside ttemperature iindicator*The outside temperature is displayedwhen the ignition is on. At temperatures from +5 °C to –5 °C, asnowflake symbol is displayed along withthe temperature.The ssnowflake ssymbol iis tto wwarn tthedriver tto ttake eextra ccare wwhen tthere iisa rrisk oof iice fforming oon tthe rroad.When the vehicle is stationary or travel-ling at very low speeds, the temperaturedisplayed may be slightly higher than theactual outside temperature as a result ofradiant heat from the engine.

IB9-036

2.8 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INSTRUMENT PANEL


5 –– MMultifunction iindicator*The multifunction indicator includes:

• Time

• Driving time

• Average speed

• Distance covered

• Autonomy

• Average fuel consumption

• Current consumptionThe function selector and the reset keyare located in the windshield wiper arm.With the ignition switched on, repeatedlypress the upper or lower part of the func-tion selector and the functions will appearone after the other.

When the ignition is switched on, thefunction which was selected beforeswitching off the ignition will be acti-vated, unless the ice warning symbolappears with outside temperature of+ 5°C and – 5°C.If the vehicle battery is disconnected, allstored values will be deleted.

B8L-103 LEO-003



MemoryThe system is equipped with two memo-ries which function automatically.A ppartial rroute mmemory ((MultifunctionIndicator 11) gathers the following databetween switching the ignition on andoff:Driving time, distance covered and usedfuel.Speed and average fuel consumption arecalculated using the above information.If driving is resumed within two hoursfrom switching off the ignition, the datacollected while driving is included in thecalculation. If driving is not resumedwithin two hours, the memory is automat-ically deleted.A ttotal rroute mmemory ((MultifunctionIndicator 22) collects driving data fromany number of partial routes up to a totalof 100 driving hours, 10,000 kilometresand a fuel consumption of 1,500 litres.This data is used to calculate averageconsumption and speed from all partialroutes.

If some of the before mentioned data isexceeded, the memory is deleted and thecalculation starts over. Contrary to thepartial route memory, this memory is notdeleted when driving is interrupted formore than two hours.

Consult mmemoryTo consult data select the memory bypressing the "Reset" key for < 2 secondsand from one of the specific MultifunctionIndicator 1 or 2 functions.– Partial route memory - Multifunction

Indicator 1– Total route memory - Multifunction

Indicator 2The following data can be displayed:

• Driving time

• Distance covered

• Average speed

• Average fuel consumption

Delete mmemoryMemory data is reset by pressing the"Reset" key for > 2 seconds.

2.10 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INSTRUMENT PANEL


Indications oon sscreenThe last selected item will be displayedwhen the ignition is switched on.

Outside ttemperature °CThe correct outside temperature takes fiveminutes to be displayed. When the vehi-cle is stationary or moving slowly, theindicated temperature may be slightlyhigher than the real outside temperaturedue to the engine heat.

WarningIn ttemperatures bbetween ++5°C aand–5°C tthe iice wwarning ssymbol iisdisplayed nnext tto tthe ooutside ttem-perature iindication. IIn ccase tthisfunction wwas nnot sselected, tthescreen wwould aautomatically ddis-play iit.

TimeThe time is displayed even if the ignitionis switched off. The clock is set with theright rotary knob below the speedometer(see "digital clock" in the InstructionsManual).

Driving ttimeMultifunction IIndicator 11 – Driving timefrom switching on the ignition or fromresetting memory (see "special routememory").Multifunction IIndicator 22 – Total dri-ving time of all partial routes (see "mem-ory of total route").The maximum value displayed with eitherselector position is 99 hours and 59 min-utes. If this value is exceeded, the displayis reset.

Average sspeed Ø km/hThe same applies to "average speed" asto "average fuel consumption".

Distance ccovered KmThe same which applies to "distance cov-ered" applies to "driving time" (seebelow). The maximum displayed distanceis 9,999 km.

Autonomy KmThis function indicates the distance whichthe vehicle can drive maintaining thesame driving style.Fuel calculation is based on the averagefuel consumption during the last 50 kilo-meters.After resetting the fuel display (i.e. afterdisconnecting the battery) the real fuelrange will be displayed after approxi-mately 50 kilometers).

INSTRUMENT PANEL ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.11


Average ffuel consumption Ø l/100 kkmIndicates the average fuel consumption,not the consumption at the moment.After switching on the ignition or afterdeleting the corresponding memory, theaverage fuel consumption is displayedafter having driven approximately 300meters. Until that moment, the screen willdisplay lines instead of the function. Thefigure is updated every 5 seconds.Multifunction IIndicator 11 – indicatesthe average fuel consumption of the par-tial trip.Multifunction IIndicator 22 – indicatesthe average fuel consumption of all of thepartial trips (see also "memory of totalroute").

NoteThe quantity of fuel which has been usedis not indicated.

Current cconsumption l/100 kkmIndicates the current consumption inl/100 km.The consumption is calculated in intervalsof 2 seconds. When the vehicle isstopped, the consumption is indicated inl/h.

6 –– SSelector llever pposition ddisplay*The position of the automatic gearboxselector lever is indicated in the display.See "Automatic gearbox" chapter.

7 –– MMileage cclock/ TTrip mmileageThe upper counter registers the total dis-tance driven and the lower one the shorttrips.The last figure of the lower counter indi-cates 100 m.The trip mileage can be put back to zeroby pressing the reset knob next to thespeedometer (partial mileage clock).

2.12 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––INSTRUMENT PANEL


7 –– SService iinterval iindicator*If a service is due, the word "Service" willflash for about 20 seconds when theengine is switched on, the vehicle is notmoving and the mileage clock reset but-ton is not touched.The deadline for any service will be dis-played 3,000 km in advance.

• Intermittent sservice* ffor 220 ssec-onds. Indicates that the time for a newservice has elapsed.

• Service KKm 33,000* ffor 220 sseconds.Indicates that the next service is due in3,000 km. Every 100 km the number ofkm will decrease by 100 km up to the indi-cation "Service".After tthe sservice hhas bbeen pperformedthe ddisplay nneeds tto bbe rreset.The display will be reset by a TechnicalService Centre as follows:

• Switch ignition off

• Keep the odometer reset button next tothe speedometer pressed down.

• Without releasing the aforementionedbutton, switch the ignition on. “SERVICE”will then appear on the display. Next, turnthe button toward the right, for at leastone second.

• The display automatically returns tonormal mode (total km + partial km), andin this way, the system remains activatedfor the oil change service.

Notes

• Do nnot zzero tthe ddisplay bbetween ttheservice iintervals. OOtherwise aan iincor-rect rreading wwill aappear.

• If tthe bbattery sshould bbe ddiscon-nected, tthe sservice iindicator iinforma-tion wwill bbe rretained.

• If tthe iinstrument ppanel cchangesdue tto rrepair, tthe sservice iinterval ddis-play mmust bbe rreset. TThis sshould bbecarried oout bby aa TTechnical SServiceCentre. IIf tthe iindicator iis nnot rrepro-grammed, tthe sservice wwork mmust bbedone iin aaccordance wwith ttheMaintenance aand IInspection PPlan aandnot tthe sservice iinterval iindicator.Only aafter aa sservice hhas bbeen ccarriedout aand tthe iindicator hhas bbeen rresetwill tthe sservice iinterval iindicatorregain iits vvalidity.

Failure iindicatorIf a failure occurs, "FAIL" would appeareither on the instrument panel or the tripmeter. The defect should be repaired by aTechnical Service Centre as soon as possi-ble.

INSTRUMENT PANEL ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––2.13


Warning llamps

The layout of the warning lamps dependson the model version and engine fitted.The symbols shown here are also on theactual warning lamps.

Page1 – Indicators ..................................2.152 – Coolant temperature/level* ........2.153 – Trailer indicators* ......................2.164 – Fuel level* .................................2.165 – Main beam ................................2.166 – Warning lamps display screen ...2.167 – Upper display:

Selector lever position display* .2.16

LEO-004



Page8 – Seat belt warning lamp*...........2.179 – Alternator ................................2.17

10 – Brakes/Hand brake ..................2.1811 – Engine oil pressure/level .........2.1812 – Tailgate ...................................2.1913 – Diagnosis*/Excess of pollution .2.1914 – Electronic immobilizer..............2.1915 – Brake wear monitor* ................2.1916 – Windscreen washer water

level*.......................................2.20

Page17 – Anti-locking brake system

(ABS)* .....................................2.2018 – TCS Wheel spin control*/

ESP Electronic StabilityProgram* .................................2.21

19 – Parking light/dipped beam ......2.2120 – Rear fog light* .........................2.2221 – Air Bag system1) ......................2.2222 – Preheating system/

Electronic Accelerator-Pedal Control (EPC)*.................2.22


IB9-024



1 –– IIndicatorsThe pilot light flashes at the same time asthe indicator. If a turn signal fails, thewarning lamp flashes twice as fast. (Notwhen towing a trailer).For more data, see "Indicators and dippedbeam lever" chapter.

2 –– Coolant ttemperature/ level*

The warning lamp lights up for a few sec-onds as a functional check when ignitionis switched on.If the lamp does not go out afterwards orlights up or flashes when driving, eitherthe coolant temperature is too high or thecoolant level too low. An acoustic signalwill sound 3 times as an additional warn-ing:Stop tthe vvehicle iimmediately, sswitchthe eengine ooff and check the level. Ifnecessary, add coolant. For more informa-tion, see the chapter “Instruments”.

Warning nnotes

• Never oopen tthe bbonnet oof yyourcar iif yyou ssee ssteam oor ccoolantcoming ffrom tthe eengine ccompart-ment –– RRisk oof sscalding! WWait uuntilno mmore ssteam oor ccoolant ccan bbeseen.

• Do nnot ttouch tthe ffan. TThe ffan ccanswitch oon ssuddenly –– eeven wwhenthe eengine iis sswitched ooff.

• Please nnote tthe ffollowing ppointsto aavoid sscalding wwith hhot ccoolant:–Exercise ccaution wwhen oopening

the ccoolant eexpansion ttank! WWhenthe eengine iis hhot tthe ccooling ssys-tem iis uunder ppressure –– DDangerof sscalding! TTherefore llet eenginecool ddown bbefore uunscrewing tthecap!

–To pprotect yyour fface, hhands aandarms yyou sshould ccover tthe ccap oofthe rradiator wwith aa llarge, tthickcloth tto pprotect aagainst ssteam oorhot ffluid.

• Ensure tthat tthe ccoolant lliquiddoes nnot ddrop oon tthe hhot eexhaustor aany oother hhot eengine ccompo-nents. TThe aantifreeze ccontained iinthe ccoolant ccould iignite.

LEO-004



If the level is correct the failure may bedue to a fan failure. In this case check theradiator fan fuse and replace if necessary.See "Fuses" chapter.If the warning lamp does not go outalthough coolant level and fan fuse are inorder, do nnot ddrive oon – call in expertassistance.If the trouble is located only in the radia-tor fan, and assuming the coolant level isin order and the temperature warninglamp is off, you may drive on to the near-est Technical Service Centre In order tomake good use of the air stream for cool-ing, do not let engine idle or drive veryslowly.

3 –– TTrailer iindicators*The warning lamp* flashes when turn sig-nals are switched on when towing atrailer.If a turn signal fails on the trailer or vehi-cle, the warning lamp does not flash.

4 –– FFuel llevel*When the ignition is switched on, thewarning light lights up as a functionalcheck.The warning lamp comes on when thereare about 7 litres left in tank.

5 –– MMain bbeam The warning lamp comes on when mainbeam is on or when the headlight flasheris used.

6 –– WWarning llamps ddisplay sscreen

7 –– SSelector llever pposition display*The automatic gearbox selector lever isshown on the display; See the "Automaticgearbox" chapter.

LEO-004



8 –– SSeat bbelt wwarning llamp* The warning lamp lights up (only for cer-tain countries) for about 6 seconds afterignition as a reminder to fasten yoursafety belt.If the seat belt is not fastened, in somecountries an acoustic signal will soundafter switching on the ignition which willstop after approximately 6 seconds orwhen the seat belt is fastened.Please rrefer tto cchapter ““Seat bbelts”.

9 –– AAlternatorThe warning lamp comes on when theignition is switched on and must go outwhen the engine is started.The alternator is driven by a long-liferibbed belt.If the warning lamp lights during the jour-ney, stop, sswitch ooff eengine and checkribbed belt.If it is loose or broken, do nnot ddrive oon– the coolant pump is no longer being dri-ven. The belt must be checked/ renewed.If the warning lamp comes on althoughthe V–belt or ribbed belt is not broken orloose, one can normally drive on to thenearest Technical Service Centre.As the battery will continue to discharge,all electrical consumers which are notabsolutely necessary should be switchedoff.

IB9-024



10 –– BBrakes/Hand bbrakeThe warning lamp comes on when thebrake fluid level is too low.The ignition must be switched on.On vehicles with ABS*, the warning lampwill light up for a few seconds when theignition is switched on or the enginestarted. If the ABS system* fails it will alsolight up together with the ABS warninglamp.

WarningIf tthe ppilot llight ddoes nnot ggo oout oorit ccomes oon dduring tthe jjourney,the ffluid llevel iin tthe ddeposit iis ttoolow. HHave tthe bbrake ssystem sser-viced iimmediately aat aa TTechnicalService CCentre.Meanwhile yyou wwill hhave tto ppressharder oon tthe bbrake ppedal aandbraking ddistances wwill bbe ggreater.If tthe bbrake ssystem aand AABS ppilotlights ccome oon aat tthe ssame ttime,the rrear wwheels mmay llock pprema-turely wwhile bbraking. GGo iimmedi-ately tto aa TTechnical SService CCentredriving vvery ccarefully aand ttake ppre-cautions.

Hand bbrakeThe pilot light will come on when the handbrake is set and the ignition is switchedon. It should go out when the hand brakeis taken off.

11 –– EEngine ooil ppressure/level

The warning light lights up for a few sec-onds as a functional check when the igni-tion is switched on.If the warning lamp is red or yellow orflashes it indicates that the engine oilpressure or level is too low. This warninglamp will also light up if there is a defectin the oil level indicator.

If llights uup oor fflashes rred(insufficient ooil ppressure)Should the warning light flash or light upwhile driving you will also hear threetimes an acoustic warning as soon as theengine runs at over 1500 r.p.m. You muststop the car and turn the engine off: checkthe oil level and top up if necessary. Seethe "Engine oil" chapter.If the warning lamp flashes even thoughthe oil level is in order, do not continuedriving. Do not even run the engine atidling speed. Call in expert assistance.If while driving the engine speed de-creases below idling speed the oil pres-sure warning lamp may light up. Increaseengine speed by accelerating or changingdown gear.



Lights uup yyellow ((oil llevel* ttoo llow)If the pilot light lights up yellow the levelis too low. Stop engine and refill oil. See"Engine oil" chapter.When opening the bonnet the oil levelwarning is reset. However, if you do notrefill oil the warning will reappear afterabout 100 km.

Flashes yyellow ((defective ooil llevel*indicator)If the oil level indicator is defective anacoustic signal will sound and the warn-ing lamp will flash several times.From the moment of the defect to thecheck-up of the engine the oil level needsto be checked regularly, preferably whenfilling the tank.

12 –– TTailgateThe pilot light* comes on if the tailgate isopen or badly closed.

13 –– DDiagnosis*/Excess oof ppollution

This pilot light lights up when the ignitionis switched on as a testing device andgoes out after a few seconds.In case of failure due to excessive pollu-tion it will start to flash.

14 –– EElectronic iimmobilizerWhen switching the ignition on, the datafrom the vehicle key is automaticallyprocessed. This procedure is confirmed bythe warning lamp lighting up briefly.If an unauthorized key is used the pilotlight will flash continuously. The vehiclecannot be started. See also "Keys withremote control" chapter.

15 –– BBrake wwear mmonitor* The pilot light comes on for about 3 sec-onds as a check when you switch the igni-tion on. If the pilot light comes on whileyou are driving you will also hear analarm.If when you switch the ignition on thepilot light lights up and you hear thealarm, it means the brake pads are worn.In tthis ccase yyou sshould ggo tto aaTechnical SService CCentre tto hhave tthefront aand rrear bbrake ppads cchecked*.

IB9-024



16 –– WWindscreen wwasher water llevel*

When the ignition is switched on, thiswarning light lights up as a functionalcheck.This warning lamp will light up if the waterlevel in the screen washer reservoirbecomes too low.Add water to the windshield and head-light washers. See "Windshield washer"chapter.

17 –– AAnti-locking bbrake system ((ABS)*

When the ignition is switched on, thiswarning light lights up as a functionalcheck.This warning lamp monitors the ABS andEDL* systems.

Anti-lock BBrake SSystem ((ABS)*The warning lamp comes on for a few sec-onds when the ignition is switched on orthe engine started. The lamp goes outafter an automatic test sequence hasbeen completed.If the ABS warning lamp does not come onwhen the ignition is switched on, doesnot go out, or comes on when driving, thesystem is faulty.A fault in the ABS system is indicated asfollows:

• Just tthe AABS wwarning llamp llightsup. The vehicle can still be braked withnormal braking system but without ABS.The vvehicle sshould bbe ttaken tto aaTechnical SService CCentre aas ssoon aaspossible.

• ABS wwarning llamp llights uuptogether wwith bbrake ssystem wwarninglamp. Not only is the ABS system defec-tive, but a change iin nnormal bbrakingcharacteristics ccan aalso bbe eexpected.

WarningIf tthere iis aa ffault iin tthe AABS ssystemthe rrear wwheels ccan llock rrelativelyquickly. IIn ccertain ccircumstancesthis ccould mmake tthe bback eend oofthe ccar sswing vviolently.If tthis hhappens ddrive wwith uutmostcare tto tthe nnearest TTechnicalService CCentre tto hhave tthe ffaultrepaired.

In versions with an anti-skid regulator inthe driving wheels, or an electronic stabil-ity programme, the TCS/ESP pilot lightwill also come on if the ABS fails. For moredetails see pages 3.10, 3.11 and 3.12.

Electronic DDifferential LLock ((EDL)*The EDL system works in conjunction withthe ABS. Failure of the EDL system is indi-cated by the ABS warning lamp lightingup. The vvehicle sshould bbe ttaken tto aaTechnical SService CCentre aas ssoon aaspossible.Further details on EDL are given on page3.10.



18 –– DDrive wwheels sspin regulator ((TCS)*

The warning light lights up for a few sec-onds as a functional check when the igni-tion is switched on; it should go off after acouple of seconds.If the TCS works while the vehicle is inmotion, the pilot light flashes.If the system is disconnected or has afault, the pilot light will stay on.As the TCS works in combination with theABS, if the ABS breaks down the TCS pilotlight also comes on.For more information see page 3.10.

18 –– EElectronic SStability Program ((ESP)*

The warning light lights up for a few sec-onds as a functional check when the igni-tion is switched on; it should go off after acouple of seconds.If the ESP works while the vehicle is inmotion, the pilot light flashes.If the system is disconnected or has afault, the pilot light will stay on.As the ESP works in combination with theABS, if the ABS breaks down the ESP pilotlight also comes on.For more information see page 3.12.

19 –– PParking llight/dipped bbeam

Dipped beam, parking or side light pilotlight (green). Works with the ignition off.

IB9-024



20 –– RRear ffog llight* The pilot light will light up as soon as therear fog light is switched on. For furtherdetails see "Switches" chapter.

21 –– AAir BBag ssystem1)

When the ignition is turned on, the warn-ing light will remain lit for a few seconds.If the warning light flashes for about 12seconds following engagement of theignition, this means that at least one AirBag has been disconnected in a TechnicalService. See “Deactivation of the AirBag”.Therefore iif tthe wwarning llight ddoesnot fflash oor iit llights oor fflashes wwhilethe vvehicle iis iin uuse, iit mmeans tthatthere iis pproblem wwith tthe AAir BBag.Proceed iimmediately tto aa TTechnicalService tto ssolve tthe pproblem.


22 –– PPreheating ssystem(Diesel engines only)

When the engine is cold the warninglamp comes on when key is turned toDrive position (ignition on).If the warning lamp does not come on,there is a defect in the glow plug system –call in expert assistance.Once the pilot light switched off switchengine on immediately. See "Starting theengine" chapter.When the engine is warm the glow pluglamp does not come on – the engine canbe started straight away.

NoteIf while driving a fault occurs in the dieselengine management system, this is indi-cated by the warning lamp flashing. Theengine must be checked as soon as pos-sible by a Technical Service Centre.

22 –– Electronic aaccelerator-pedal ccontrol ((EPC)

If there is a fault in the accelerator pedalworking, a warning light will switch on.Have the fault repaired at a TechnicalService Centre.

OPENING AND CLOSING ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.23


Keys

The vehicle is supplied with two keys Awhich fit all locks.In addition, plastic key chain B with thekey number is included.

Warning

• Always ttake tthe kkey ffrom ttheignition wwhenever yyou lleave the vvehicle –– eeven iif oonly ffor aamoment. TThis iis pparticularly iimpor-tant iif cchildren aare tto rremain iin tthevehicle. TThey mmight sstart ttheengine oor ssome oother eelectricalcomponent, ee.g. eelectric wwindows.Risk oof aaccident!

• Wait uuntil tthe vvehicle hhasstopped bbefore ttaking tthe kkey oout.Otherwise tthe ssteering mmay bblock.

Replacement kkeysFor rreasons oof ssecurity, rreplacementkeys aare oonly aavailable ffrom SSEATOfficial SService CCentres.

Key ttagThe key tag contains the key number aswell as the secret code for the immo-bilizer, which are needed to obtainreplacement keys. With this number youcan order a duplicate of your key from aSEAT Official Service Center.

NoteYou sshould kkeep tthis pplastic kkeychain iin aa pparticularly ssafe pplacesince oonly wwith tthis nnumber ccancopies oof tthe kkey bbe mmade.For this reason you should give the buyerthis key tag if you sell the vehicle.

B11-002D

2.24 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– OPENING AND CLOSING


Vehicles with remote control* have twokeys. One is a conventional key (see pre-vious page). The other incorporates aremote control function* (see "Radio-fre-quency remote control" chapter).

NoteIn some model versions the remote con-trol key may be folded. Its remote controlfunction is identical to any remote controlkey. See "Radio-frequency remote con-trol" chapter.

Foldable kkey*To uunfold the key sword, press button A.It will unfold with a spring.To ffold the key sword, press button A andguide it with your hand until it is com-pletely folded.

LEO-005 LEO-006

Keys wwith rremote ccontrol*



Electronic iimmobiliser

The immobiliser prevents unauthorisedpersons from using your vehicle.A micro-chip is located in the head of thekey which automatically deactivates theimmobiliser when the key is inserted inthe ignition lock.The system is automatically activatedwhen the ignition is switched off.

NoteThe engine can thus only be started with acorrectly coded Genuine SEAT key.Trouble free operation of your vehicle canonly be guaranteed when using genuinekeys.

Doors



From tthe ooutside oof tthe vvehicle, it maybe locked or unlocked using the driverdoor key.Upon oopening, the latch will rise up (forvehicles with central locking).For vehicles equipped with electric win-dows and central locking, if the key ismaintained in the opening position all ofthe electric side windows will open.Upon cclosing, the latch will descend (forvehicles with central locking).In some vehicle models equipped withelectric windows and central locking, ifthe key is maintained in the locking posi-tion on the driver side, any side windowsleft open as well as the electric sunroofwill close.For vehicles without central locking, thepassenger door and the rear doors may belocked from the outside without using akey. Just press the button down and closethe door.The latch on the driver’s door may not bepushed down while the door is open (onlyin vehicles without central locking). Thisavoids accidentally leaving the keys in theignition.

Warning!

• Exercise eextreme ccaution wwhenclosing tthe wwindows aand tthe ssun-roof ffrom tthe ooutside oof tthe vvehi-cle.

• Closing ffrom tthe ooutside wwith-out ttaking ccare oor oobserving aall tthevehicle mmay ccause bbruising fforother ppeople eespecially cchildren.

• When llocking aa vvehicle, nneverleave cchildren uunaccompaniedinside, aas iit wwill mmake iit mmore ddiffi-cult tto pprovide aassistance iifrequired.

From tthe iinside oof tthe vvehicle, all thedoors may be locked by pushing the secu-rity buttons down (in vehicles withoutcentral locking).

Warning!When tthe ddoors aare llocked, aanyintrusion iis iimpeded, ffor eexamplewhile sstopped aat aa rred llight.



Central llocking*

When the key is used in the driver’s door,all doors and the boot are unlocked at thesame time by the central locking system.The central locking system is fitted with alocking ssecurity ssystem (double lock):When the vehicle is locked with the key orthe remote control from the outside, all ofthe doors are locked impeding anyattempt to force them.This system may be activated from theoutside either by using the key or theradio-frequency remote control*.

Locking llocations oof tthe vvehicle

Outside:Driver’s door or by using the radio-fre-quency remote control*.

Inside:By using the central locking switchlocated on the handle of the driver’s door(simple closure) (see page 2.29).

OpeningTo open your vehicle turn the key in thelock of the driver’s door to the openingposition or use the radio-frequencyremote control*. All of the doors will beunlockedWhen the vehicle is opened using theradio-frequency remote control*, the lock-ing security system as well as the antitheft alarm* are immediately deactivated.The indicator on the driver’s door will stopflashing. This warning light is fitted tovehicles equipped with the locking secu-rity system or the anti theft alarm*.

When the vehicle is opened using the key,the locking security system (double lock-ing) and the anti-theft alarm* are immedi-ately deactivated.When the vehicle is opened, the interiorlighting will come on for 30 seconds as ifa door is open and the indicators willflash twice.If, for any reason, the central lockingceases to function then, in general, thedrivers door and boot may be openedconventionally using the key but neitherthe locking security system nor the antitheft alarm can be activated.If the key is maintained in the openingposition in the driver’s door the electricwindows will open, in vehicles equippedwith them.

NotesIf for any reason the central lockingceases to function, neither the rear doorsnor the passenger door may be opened.The lock mechanism of the driver’s door,the boot and the ignition locking mecha-nism all possess a rotation mmechanism(which will turn freely without the key)*.When the locking mechanism is operatedwith any object other than the key, therotation mechanism is activated. Themanipulated cylinder will rotate withoutopening the vehicle or turning the igni-tion on.If the rotation mechanism is activatedwhen the key is inserted then remove thekey fully and then reinsert it to open thevehicle. There will be no damage to thelocks.

1) This function may vary according to the modeland country.



Locking

• To lock your vehicle, turn tthe kkeyonce (the double lock is activated) to thelocking position in the driver’s door lock.All of the doors and the boot will lock. Thelocking security system (double lock) andthe anti theft alarm* will be immediatelyactivated and the indicator light on thedriver’s door will begin to flash to indicatethis. This warning light is fitted to vehiclesequipped with the locking security systemor the anti theft alarm*.When the vehicle is locked, all of the inte-rior lights that may be on are turned offand the indicator lights flash once.The activation of the locking security sys-tem (double lock) is indicated by theflashing of the indicator light located onthe top of the driver’s door panel at thelevel of the window. Also, for vehiclesequipped with the anti theft alarm*, theindicator light will indicate when thealarm is on.

Warning!

• If tthe vvehicle iis cclosed ffrom ttheoutside bby tturning tthe kkey oonce ttothe llocking pposition ((double llock),no pperson ––especially cchildren-should rremain iinside tthe vvehicledue tto tthe ffact tthat tthe ddoors ccan-not bbe oopened ffrom tthe iinsideusing tthe ddoor hhandle oor tthe ccen-tral llocking sswitch ((see ccentrallocking sswitch iinstructions). IIf tthevehicle iis eequipped wwith eelectricwindows, tthese ccannot bbe oopenedfrom tthe iinside eeither ((see ttheinstructions ffor tthe eelectric wwin-dows).

• Children sshould nnever bbe lleftalone iinside tthe vvehicle ddue tto tthefact tthat iif tthe ddoors aare aacciden-tally llocked, iit wwill bbe ddifficult ttoprovide aassistance iif nneeded.

• If the key is turned ttwo cconsecutivetimes to the locking position in less thanone second then only the simple lockingmechanism is activate for all doors andthe boot. The locking security system(double lock) is not activated.If the locking security system (doublelock) is not activated then the vehicle maybe unlocked from tthe iinside. To do this,simply pull the corresponding door han-dle until the door opens.

• For vehicles1) fitted with electric win-dows or an electric sunroof, when the keyis maintained in the locking position theelectric windows will close fully followedby the electric sunroof if it is open.

• If the driver’s door is incorrectlyclosed or open (door “ajar”), the vehiclecannot be locked. In order to lock thedoors of the vehicle, the driver’s doorshould be completely closed. If any otherdoor of the vehicle is incorrectly shut thenall doors except this door will be locked. Ifproperly closed afterwards, this door willjoin the locking system of the vehicle.In the case where the vehicle is openedusing the radio-frequency remote controland neither the locks or the doors areused, after 30 seconds the vehicle willautomatically be relocked so that it is notaccidentally left open.

1) This function may vary according to the modeland country.



Central llocking bbutton*The central locking button makes it possi-ble to lock/unlock the whole vehicle fromthe inside. The button is located in thedoor release lever on the driver’s door(see illustration).

LockingBy pressing the right hand side of theswitch A all doors and the boot lid/tail-gate are locked. It is now no longer possi-ble to open the doors or boot lid/tailgate.Unwanted access from outside (e.g. attraffic lights) is also prevented in thisway.If the driver’s door is open it will not belocked. This is to prevent you from lockingyourself out.The locking security system (double lock)and the anti theft alarm* are not acti-vated if the push button is used.

Automatic LLockingThe doors will lock automatically whenthe vehicle exceeds speeds of 15 km/h.

NotesIf tthe vvehicle iis llocked uusing tthe ccen-tral llocking sswitch, iindividual ddoorsmay bbe uunlocked. TTo ddo tthis, ssimplypull tthe ccorresponding ddoor hhandleuntil tthe ddoor oopens.

LEO-007A

2.30 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––OPENING AND CLOSING


UnlockingPushing the left part of the locking switchB will open all doors.

Automatic UUnlockingThe doors unlock automatically when thekey is removed from the ignition.The button will also function when theignition is switched off.

Warning

• If tthe ccentral llocking bbutton iinthe ddoor rrelease llever oon tthe ddri-ver’s ddoor iis ooperated, aall ootherdoors aand tthe ttailgate aare llockedautomatically.However wwhen tthe ddoors aarelocked ooutside hhelp iin aan eemer-gency iis hhindered, aand sso cchildrenshould nnever bbe lleft aalone iin tthevehicle.

• Locking tthe ddoors aand ttailgateprevents iintruders ffrom ggetting iinthe vvehicle, ee.g. aat ttraffic llights.

• For vvehicles eequipped wwith AAirBags aand oonly iin tthe eevent oof aa ccol-lision wwhere aan AAir BBag iis ddeto-nated, tthe ccentral llocking wwillunlock aall ddoors aautomatically ttofacilitate tthe eevacuation oof tthevehicle. TThe vvehicle’s iinterior llightand tthe wwarning llights wwill rremainlit uuntil tthe kkey iis rremoved ffromthe iignition aand rreinserted aagain.

• Once tthe vvehicle hhas bbeenlocked wwith tthe rradio wwave rremotecontrol oor wwith aa rregular kkey tthecentral llocking kknob bbecomesinactive. IIt nno llonger wworks. FForthis rreason, ddo nnot lleave aanyonein tthe vvehicle, iin pparticular cchil-dren, ssince iit iis nnot ppossible ttoopen ffrom tthe iinside oor ffrom ttheoutside. FFurthermore, tthe vvehiclecannot bbe uunlocked bby sstickingthe hhand iin tthe wwindow aandpulling tthe kknob ffrom tthe iinside oorthe ccentral llock ccommand.Therefore, nno iintruder ccan uunlockthe vvehicle.

• Take ggreat ccare wwhen cclosing tthewindows aand tthe eelectric rroof*from tthe ooutside!

• If yyou cclose ffrom tthe ooutsidecarelessly oor wwithout vvisibility yyoumay ccause sserious iinjury eespe-cially tto cchildren.

OPENING AND CLOSING ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––2.31


Child ssafetyThe rear doors also have child-proofcatches.

Child llockUsing the vehicle key, turn the child lockslot in the direction of the arrow (figureA). This way, the inside door handle of theaffected door is deactivated and the doorcan only be opened from the outside. Thesecurity button must be in the up1) posi-tion and the vehicle unlocked.

Removing tthe cchild llockUsing the vehicle key, turn the child lockslot in the direction of the arrow (figureB). This will reactivate the door handle ofthe affected door and it may once againbe opened from the inside. The securitybutton must be in the up1) position andthe vehicle unlocked.

1) Only vehicles without central locking.

B6L-0012



Tailgate

The doors can be locked and unlockedfrom the tailgate via the central lockingsystem. It is also possible to lock the lug-gage compartment permanently

Locking ppositions:Position AA:– Doors and tailgate are locked (vehicles

with alarm).– Only tailgate locked (vehicles without

alarm)Position BB:– Doors and tailgate unlocked (vehicles

with alarm)– Only tailgate unlocked (vehicles with-

out alarm)Position CC:– Doors and tailgate permanently locked

(vehicles with alarm)– Only tailgate permanently locked (vehi-

cles without alarm)If the key is removed in the horizontalposition from the slot, the tailgate will beexcluded from the central locking andremains permanently locked1).To include the tailgate in the central lock-ing system1) turn the key to the verticalposition in the key slot.

1) Only for vehicles with an alarm* and centrallocking.

Opening and cclosing tthe ttailgateTo oopen the tailgate when key slot is ver-tical, pull control behind finger strip ontailgate and lift (see illustration).To cclose ttailgate pull it down and slam itgently.A grip has been worked into the insidetrim of the tailgate which makes closingeasier.

Warning

• After cclosing tthe ttailgate aalwayspull iit uupwards tto mmake ssure iit iisproperly cclosed. OOtherwise iit mmayspring oopen wwhile tthe vvehicle iis iinmotion, eeven iif iit hhas bbeen llocked.

• The ttailgate mmust aalways bbe ffullyclosed wwhen tthe vvehicle iis mmovingto pprevent eexhaust ggases ggettinginside.Danger oof iintoxication!

TO8-011TO8-010



Anti-theft aalarm ssystem*

With the anti-theft alarm, break-inattempts and theft of the vehicle are ren-dered more difficult. The system triggersacoustic and optical warning signals ifsomeone tries to gain unauthorisedaccess to the vehicle.The alarm system and the locking securitysystem (double lock) are automaticallyactivated when the driver’s door islocked. To lock the door either turn thekey once in the lock towards the lockingposition or press button 2 on the radio-frequency remote control*. The system isthen activated immediately and the indi-cator light located on the driver’s doorwill flash along with the flashers indicat-ing that the system have been turned on.

• For vehicles equipped with an addi-tional alarm system* , if you access thecar by using the driver’s door key youhave 15 seconds to introduce the key intothe ignition lock and activate it. Other-wise the alarm will trigger off for 30 sec.and car start up will be deactivated.You can only turn off the alarm by press-ing the "open" key on the remote control.For cars without radio-frequency remotecontrol keys you must wait for 30 sec.until the alarm cuts off. Then close thedoor with the key and repeat the previ-ously described process all over again.The alarm signal will be triggered for 30seconds if access is attempted via anydoor that is not the driver's.

NoteWhen you lock the car the indicator pilotlights will only come on if the alarm hasbeen properly activated (all security areashave been properly locked).If a door or the boot are left open whenthe alarm is connected, they will not beincorporated into the car’s protection sys-tem. If after you lock the doors or boot,they will be automatically incorporatedinto the security areas and the indicatorsignals will show.If the vehicle is locked and the alarm isactivated, you do not need to open the carto deactivate it.To do this, turn the key twice in the dri-ver’s door lock to the lock position orpress twice the lock button in the key han-dle fitted with the radio-frequency remotecontrol.The alarm will be triggered if, with thevehicle locked, one of

• the doors,

• the bonnet, or

• the bootis opened or

• the ignition is switched on.When the alarm is triggered the hornsounds and a flashing signal is activatedfor about 30 seconds.To ddisactivate tthe aanti-theft aalarmturn tthe kkey iin tthe oopening ddirectionor ppress tthe ““open” kkey oon ttheremote ccontrol.– two fflickers: oopen aand ddisactivate

the aalarm– one fflicker: llock aand aactivate aalarm



Notes

• The warning lamp goes out afterapprox. 28 days. This prevents the batterybecoming discharged when the vehicle isnot used for a long period. The alarm sys-tem remains activated.

• The alarm signal will be triggered a sec-ond time if one of the protected parts ofthe car is interfered with again after thealarm signal has stopped (for instance ifthe tailgate is opened after one of thedoors has been opened).

• The alarm can also be activated anddeactivated via the radio wave remote-control*. Further information can befound under the heading ”Radio waveremote control”.



Volumetric ssensor*This is a surveillance function or a controlincorporated in the anti-theft alarm sys-tem which detects through ultrasoundunauthorized access to the vehicle inte-rior (i.e. through a window). This system has two sensors: a transmit-ter and a receiver.

ActivateThe volumetric sensor is switched onautomatically when the anti-theft alarm isactivated whether by locking manuallywith the key or by remote control.

DeactivateThe volumetric sensor is deactivatedwhen:1 – Unlocking the vehicle manually with

the key in the door lock or by radiowave remote control.

2 – Pressing the button located in thevehicle’s interior behind the driver’sdoor in the lower part for at least onesecond immediately after havingunlocked the driver’s door and afterhaving removed the key from theignition.

Note

• If, after deactivating the volumetricsensor, the door is locked with the remotecontrol or manually with the key in thedoor lock within less than 30 seconds thevolumetric sensor is deactivated eventhough all other anti-theft alarm functionsremain activated.

• After this time-span the deactivation ofthe volumetric sensor is canceled.

• In case of relocking while the alarm wasactivated without the volumetric sensorfunction, this relocking will cause a con-nection of all the alarm functions, exceptfor the volumetric sensor. If it was not dis-connected voluntarily it will be reacti-vated during the following alarm connec-tion.

• If the volumetric sensor caused thealarm to set off this will be indicated byflickering of the pilot light in the driver’sdoor when unlocking the vehicle. Thisflickering is different than the flickering ofthe activated alarm.

• If the volumetric sensor has caused thealarm to set off three times the alarm sys-tem will no longer go off.

• Other sensors (door opening, luggagecompartment, etc.) will continue to set offthe alarm.

AR0-041



Radio-frequency rremote ccontrol kkey*

The following functions can be operatedusing the radio wave remote control with-out using the key manually. – Locking and unlocking the central lock-

ing system.– Connecting and disconnecting the anti-

theft alarm system*.– Switch on interior light (see "Interior

lights" chapter)The radio wave transmitter with its batteryis located in the handle of the key. Theradio wave receiver is located inside thevehicle.

The effective rrange (red area) of theremote control is shown in the illustra-tion. The maximum range depends on var-ious conditions.The range will reduce as the batteries losepower.

Note

• The remote control becomes inopera-tive when the key is in the ignition.

TO8-012



Opening aand cclosing tthe vvehicleTo unlock the vehicle, point the key fromwithin the effective range at the vehicleand briefly press the “open” button(arrow 1). The indicators will flicker. Tolock the vehicle, briefly press the ”close”button (arrow 2). The indicators flickeronce.If you press the ”close” button (arrow 2)twice, the dead-lock mechanism andanti-theft alarm are deactivated and theindicators do not work.

Selective UUnlockingPress the opening button (arrow 1) onceto open only the driver’s door, leaving therest closed.Press the opening button (arrow 1) twiceto open all doors.

NotesWhen the close or open buttons arepressed a warning lamp will flash in thekey. If this lamp does not flash, the bat-tery in the key might be discharged. Inthis case a Technical Service Centreshould check or change the battery.

When the dead-lock mechanism and theanti-theft alarm* are activated, proceedas follows:If the vehicle is unlocked by using theopen button on the radio-frequencyremote control*, all of the doors and theboot1) will be relocked automatically ifthey are not opened within 30 seconds.However, the locking security system andthe anti theft alarm will remain deacti-vated during these 30 seconds. This func-tion prevents the vehicle being acciden-tally oopen within range of theradio-frequency remote control.

1) The alarm and dead-lock mechanism will remainin the same position as before opening.

LEO-009



SynchronizationIf the vehicle cannot be opened by press-ing the radio transmitter button, it couldbe that the code of the key no longermatches that of the control unit in thevehicle. This can occur when the transmit-ter button is frequently pressed outsidethe effective range of the system. We rrec-ommend tthat aa TTechnical SServiceCentre ttake ccare oof tthis ffunction.To synchronize the key again the follow-ing procedure must be followed:1- Both vehicle keys, the key with the

radio transmitter (A) and the conven-tional key (B), must be used.

2- The synchronization process must becompleted within 30 sseconds.

3- Use key (B) to switch on ignition andkey (A) to program.

4- Make sure that the vehicle is openbefore you proceed to the program-ming.

5- Place key (B) in the ignition and switchon.

6- Use key (A) to lock the driver’s doormanually.

7- Now unlock and lock manually thedriver’s door with key (A) while press-ing button (1 oopen).

8- Take the key out of the ignition.

Uncoded keys can be obtained at SEATOfficial Service Centers. These keys, how-ever, must be synchronized by a SEATOfficial Service Center as the code for theimmobilizer also has to be programmedin the head of the key.

Authorization ffor uuseThe radio wave remote control fulfills allnorms. Its use has been approved by thecorresponding German office (FederalApprovals Office For Telecommunicationsof The Federal Republic of Germany).All components have been markedaccording to current stipulations.This authorization is the basis forapproval in other countries.



Electric wwindows*

The switches are located in the driver’sdoor (see illustration). 1 – Driver’s door2 – Front passenger door3 – Safety switch*4 – Right rear door*5 – Left rear door.*The electric windows can be activatedwith the ignition on. With the ignition off, the windows can beactivated for 10 minutes. They will stopworking when a front door is opened. The safety switch blocks the buttons ofthe rear windows. When the switch ispressed again the buttons of the reardoors will become operational.

There are additional controls on the pas-senger door and the rear doors* for eachwindow. These controls will only open orclose their respective windows.With the safety switch 3 in the driver’sdoor, the rear electric windows can bedeactivated.– Safety switch out:

The switches in the rear doors can beused.

– Safety switch in:The switches in the rear doors cannot beused.

LEO-010A



Electric windows with an automatic clos-ing function* are equipped with a power limiter.The windows stop closing automaticallyshould anything block it. However tthispower llimiter ffunction ddoes nnot wworkwhen tthe wwindows aare cclosed ffromoutside wwith tthe iignition kkey.

Warning

• Always rremove tthe iignition kkeywhen lleaving tthe vvehicle –– eeven iifonly ffor aa sshort ttime. NNever lleavechildren aalone iin tthe vvehicle.The eelectric wwindows aare oonlydeactivated wwhen tthe ddriver’s oorpassenger ddoors aare oopened.

• Watch oout wwhen cclosing tthe wwin-dows! CCareless oor uuncontrolledclosing oof tthe wwindows ccan ccauseinjuries.

• The ddriver mmust wwarn tthe ootheroccupants oof tthe rrisk wwhich ccare-less ooperation oof eelectric wwindowsentails.

• No oone sshould rremain iin tthevehicle wwhen llocked ffrom tthe oout-side, aas tthe wwindows ccannot bbeopened iin tthe eevent oof aan eemer-gency.

• Take ggreat ccare wwhen cclosing tthewindows aand tthe eelectric rroof*from tthe ooutside!

• Careless cclosing ffrom tthe oout-side oor wwithout vvisibility ccan ccauseserious iinjury, eespecially tto cchil-dren.

Window oopening aand cclosingvariants wwith tthe ddoor kkeys

Opening vvariants

• The window is opened by pressing thecorresponding door button lightly.When the button is released the openingprocess will stop.

• Press the driver’s side door button fulldown to open the window fully and auto-matically.When the button is pressed again the win-dow stops immediately.

Closing vvariants

• The window is closed by pulling the cor-responding closing button lightlyWhen the button is released the closingprocess will stop.

• Pull the driver’s side door button fullyto close the window fully and automati-cally.When the button is pulled again the win-dow stops immediately.

NoteThe controls of the passenger and reardoors can only be used to open or closethe windows. Only the front windows maybe opened or closed automatically fromthe driver's door controls.



The rroll-back ffunction*1 – If the window in the driver or passen-

ger‘s door is hindered whilst closingthrough stiffness or by an obstacle(roll-back function), the window willopen again immediately.

2 – After the window has opened, youmust lift and hold the appropriateswitch for the affected window againwithin 5 seconds. If the window is stillhindered whilst closing through stiff-ness or by an obstacle, the windowwill stop closing.

3 – After the window has stopped, youmust lift and hold the switch againwithin 5 seconds in order to close thewindow.The wwindow wwill nnow cclose wwith-out ppower llimitation.

NoteIf you wait for longer than 5 secondsbetween the individual steps, the systemwill reactivate.

Warning

• Take ggreat ccare wwhen cclosing tthewindows! CClosing tthe wwindows iina ccareless oor uuncontrolled mmannermay ccause bbruises, eespecially iinchildren.

• The ddriver mmust wwarn tthe ootheroccupants oof tthe rrisk wwhich ccare-less ooperation oof eelectric wwindowsentails.



Function oof tthe eelectric wwindowswith iignition sswitched ooffAfter the ignition has been switched off,the windows can still be operated forabout ten minutes so long as the driver orpassenger doors are not opened.The windows on vehicles with centrallocking can also be closed or openedfrom the outside (in cars with asliding/electric roof you can only closethem). For this purpose, the key must bein the lock of the driver’s door and held inthe locking or open position.

OpeningPress the front edge of the respective but-ton.

ClosingLift the front edge of the respective but-ton.

NoteIf the window in the driver or passengerdoor is hindered whilst closing throughstiffness or by an obstacle (roll-back func-tion), the window will open again immedi-ately. In this case you can only close the windowagain after the ignition has been switchedon.

NotesThe automatic opening/closing, and roll-back functions* on the driver and passen-ger door windows will not function afterthe vehicle battery has been discon-nected/reconnected.To reinstall this function after reconnect-ing the battery, please note the followingpoints.

• Lock vvehicle from the outside via thedriver’s door. When doing this pleaseensure that all doors and windows areclosed completely.

• Lock tthe vvehicle aagain via the driver’sdoor. Hold tthe kkey iin tthe llocking pposi-tion ffor aat lleast oone ssecond.This reactivates the system.

Warning

• Be vvery ccareful wwhen cclosing ttheelectric wwindows aand rroof ffrom ttheoutside!

• Be vvery ccareful wwhen cclosing tthewindows! CClosing ffrom tthe ooutsidewithout vvisibility oor iin aa ccarelessmanner ccan ccause sserious iinjury,especially wwith cchildren.

• Children sshould nnever rremainalone iinside tthe vvehicle wwhen iit iislocked ffrom tthe ooutside, aas oout-side hhelp wwill bbe hhindered iin ttheevent oof aan eemergency.



Sliding/tilting rroof*

With ignition switched on, the sliding/tilting roof can be opened and closed/lifted and lowered with the rotary switch.Press the switch for emergency or fullstrength closing.After the ignition has been switched off,the roof can still be operated so long asthe driver or passenger doors are notopened.

Warning

• Take ggreat ccare wwhen cclosing ttheroof! CClosing tthe rroof ccarelessly oorin aan uuncontrolled mmanner mmaycause bbruises, eespecially iin cchil-dren.

• The ddriver mmust wwarn tthe oothervehicle ooccupants oof tthe rriskwhich ccareless ooperation oof ttheroof eentails.

• Always rremove tthe iignition kkeywhen lleaving tthe vvehicle, eevenonly ffor aa mmoment. NNever lleavechildren uunattended iin tthe vvehi-cle.

To oopenTurn the switch clockwise. There areintermediate opening positions that areshown by notches on the switch. Thebiggest notch shows the biggest openingadvisable for high speed driving with min-imum aerodynamic noise.To completely open the roof keep turningthe switch to position B. In this position,however, there can be noise due to thewind.

To ccloseTurn the switch to rest position or startingposition A. If you turn it anti-clockwisethe roof will close completely. If the roof iscompletely open and you turn the switchanti-clockwise, you can put the roof in theintermediate opening positions repre-sented by the notches.

To rraiseFrom starting position A turn the switchanti-clockwise. The roof will be raisedaccording to the notches on the switch.

To cclose/lowerTurn the switch clockwise until it reachesthe rest/starting position A.

NoteThe sun screen to prevent intensive sunrays shining in can be slid open or closedby hand with roof open or closed.You should ensure, especially when thesun screen is closed that the tilting roof isclosed when the vehicle is parked or dur-ing a sudden rainfall.

Convenience llocking*The sliding roof can also be closed whenlocking the driver’s door:Hold the key in the locking position untilthe roof is closed.

TO1-001



Roll bback ffunctionThe roof has a roll back function to avoidpossible injury when closing the roof.When the roof is closed in a normal way, itwill re-open automatically if it encountersany obstacle. However tthis wwill nnotoccur iif tthe eemergency oor mmaximumstrength llock hhas bbeen aactivated.

NoteThere iis aan eemergency oor mmaximumstrength llock wwhich sshould oonly bbeused iin ccase oof aabsolute nnecessity,e.g. wwhen ddriving aat hhigh sspeeds oorwhen ddirt oor iice sstop tthe rrails ffromoperating pproperly. TTo cclose ppress tthelower ppart oof tthe sswitch aand tthe rroofwill cclose fforcibly.

Warning

• Be vvery ccareful wwhen cclosing ttheroof! CClosing ffrom tthe ooutsidewithout vvisibility oor iin aa ccarelessmanner ccan ccause sserious iinjury,especially wwith cchildren.

• The ddriver sshould wwarn tthe ootheroccupants tthat ccareless uuse oof ttheroof iis ddangerous.

• Always rremove tthe iignitionwhen lleaving tthe vvehicle –– eeven iifonly ffor aa sshort ttime. NNever lleavechildren aalone iin tthe vvehicle.

• When uusing tthe mmaximumstrength cclosure tthere iis aa rrisk oofaccident oor iinjury. TTake eextremecare wwhen uusing tthis ffunction.

Emergency ooperationIf the system should develop a fault theroof can also be closed by hand.

• Remove the plastic cover at rear usinga screwdriver.

• Pull crank out of cover retainer, insert itin the opening and close sliding roof.

• Replace crank in retainer, and replacecover.

B45-199C

LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.45


Switches

1 –– LLighting sswitch– Switched off

– Side lights1)

– Dipped or main beamThe lamps will only function with the igni-tion on. When the engine is being startedand after ignition has been switched off,they automatically switch to the sidelights.Low, high beam and flash light. See"Indicators and dipped beam lever" chap-ter.

NoteIf lights are not switched off and the igni-tion key is removed, a buzzer* will soundwhen the driver’s door is open.

Front ffog llights* With lighting switch in side light ordipped/main beam position pull switchout to first detent.

1) In some countries, when the side lights areswitched on with the ignition on, the dippedheadlights also come on with reduced inten-sity.

Rear ffog llight*

Vehicles wwithout ffog llightsTurn lighting switch to dipped/main beamposition and pull switch out to stop.

Vehicles wwith ffog llightsWith lighting switch in dipped/mainbeam position, pull switch out to 2nddetent.

Note

• A warning lamp in the instrument panellights up when the rear fog light isswitched on.

• Due to the amount of dazzle it causes,the rear fog light should only be switchedon when the visibility is very poor (e.g. insome E.U. countries, 50 metres).The electrical system of the factory fittedtow bar* is wired up so that when towinga trailer fitted with rear fog lights, the rearfog lights on the towing vehicle are auto-matically switched off.

o

TO8-014A

2.46 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– LIGHTS AND VISIBILITY


2 –– IInstrument llightingWhen the lights are on, the level of theinstrument lighting can be set to anyintensity by turning the knurled wheelnext to the light switch.

3 –– HHeadlight rrange ccontrol*With the electric adjustment of the head-lamp range, headlights can be matchedexactly to the load condition of vehicle.This prevents oncoming traffic from beingdazzled more than is unavoidable. At thesame time the correct headlight beamadjustment provides the best possiblevisibility for the driver.The headlights can only be regulated withthe dipped headlights switched on.To lower the beams, turn knurled discfrom the basic position (0) downwards.

4 –– HHeated rrear wwindowThe heating works only when ignition ison. When heater is on a lamp in the switchlights up.

❀As ssoon aas wwindow iis cclear,switch eelement ooff. TThe rreduced

current cconsumption hhelps tto rreducefuel cconsumption –– ssee ppage 33.19.On vehicles with electrically adjustableexterior mirrors the mirrors are heated aslong as the rear window heating isswitched on.

TO8-014A TO8-015



5 –– HHazard wwarning llightsThe system also works when the ignitionis switched off.Switch on the hazard warning lights if, forexample:– Your vehicle stops because of a techni-

cal defect,– You have an emergency– You reach the tail end of a traffic jam.When the hazard warning lights areswitched on, all turn signal lights flashsimultaneously. The warning lamps forthe indicators and a warning lamp in theswitch will also flash.Observe llegal rrequirements wwhenemploying ssuch ssafety mmeasures.

6 –– SSeat hheating* ffor lleft sseatFor further information on its functionssee "Heated seats" chapter.

7 –– SSeat hheating* ffor rright sseatFor further information on its functionssee "Heated seats" chapter.

Switches iin ddriver’s ddoor

Electric wwindowsTo use the electric windows switches see"Electric windows" chapter.

Central llocking bbuttonTo use this switch see "Central locking"chapter.

Wing mmirror aadjustmentSee "Rear-view mirrors" chapter.



Sun vvisors

Switches iin tthe ccentral cconsole

Unlocking tthe ttank fflapYou must press the key to unlock the tankflap. It can only be unlocked when theignition is off.

Anti-skidding ssystem oof tthe ddrivewheels ((TCS)*. EElectronic SStabilityProgram ((ESP)*The TCS or ESP connect automaticallywhen the engine is switched on. If neces-sary, they may be switched off briefly bypressing corresponding switch.The pilot light will light up if it is discon-nected. See "Warning lamps" chapter.For further information see pages 3.10,3.11 and 3.12.

The sun visors can be pulled out of theside mountings and swung towards thedoors.The make up mirrors are fitted with acover flap. A lamp* will light up in thecover when it is folded up.

LEO-011



Indicators aand ddipped bbeam llever

The turn signals only work when the igni-tion is switched on.Right turn signals – lever up (1)Left turn signals – lever down (2)When the turn signals are switched on thepilot light will light up simultaneously. See"Warning lamps" chapter.The turn signals switch off automaticallywhen the steering wheel returns to its nor-mal position.

To ssignal aa llane cchangeMove the lever up (1) or down (2) to thepressure point and hold in this position –the warning lamp should flash at thesame time.

Headlight fflasherPull the lever towards the steering wheel(3) – the main beam warning lamp willlight up.

Short oor llong bbeamsWith the long or short beam connectedpush the lever towards the steering wheel(4). When main beam is on, the mainbeam pilot light will light up.

Parking llights*The parking lights only work when igni-tion is switched off.Right parking lights – lever up (1)Left parking lights – lever down (2)If the ignition key has been removed, abuzzer* will sound when the driver’s dooris open.

NoteThe uuse oof tthe ssignals aand llightingdescribed hhere iis ssubject tto llocal rreg-ulations.

TO8-016A



Interior llights

A –– FFront iinterior llight Switch positions:0 – OffLeft – Light on continuouslyRight – Door contact switchInterior lights with delayed switch off*remain on for about 30 seconds afterdoors are closed.

B –– FFront rreading llight*The reading light is turned on or off bypressing the appropriate switch B.

Boot llight*The light is on when the tailgate is open(including with lights and ignition off).You must therefore always make sure youclose the boot, as well as when you parkthe car.

Rear iinterior llightsSwitch positions:0 – OffIntermediate position – Door contactswitchLeft – Light on continuously

Control oof iinterior llightsThe interior light is switched on forapprox. 30 seconds when the vehicle isunlocked, a door opened or the ignitionkey removed. The switch must be in thedoor contact position for this function.It is however switched off as soon as thevehicle is locked or the ignition switchedon.With the door open, the interior light willremain on for a maximum of ten minutes.This prevents the battery from discharg-ing.

Glove bbox llight*The light in the glove box on the passen-ger side only comes on when the ignitionis on and the lid is open.

B45-144C B45-146C



Windscreen wwipers aand wwashers

WarningThe wwindshield wwiper bblades mmustbe iin pperfect ccondition tto eensuregood vvisibility ((see ""Windscreenwipers" cchapter).

Wipers and washers only work when igni-tion is switched on.When iit iis ffreezing, ccheck tthat tthewiper bblades aare nnot ffrozen tto ttheglass bbefore sswitching tthe wwipers oonfor tthe ffirst ttime.The heated windscreen washer jets* areswitched on when the ignition is switchedon and the amount of heat is regulatedautomatically according to the outsidetemperature.

Note

• Fill container. See "Windscreen washer"chapter.

• Replace wiper blades. See "Wiperblades" chapter.

Windscreen

• Windscreen wwipers ooffLever at position 0.

• Intermittent wwipeLever at position 1.Use lever A to change the intervals of theintermittent wipe. Four levels are avail-able.Lever to the right – brief intervalsLever to the left – long intervalsThe intervals of each level are set in func-tion of the time that elapses betweeneach sweep of the wipers.

• Wiper sslowLever at position 2.

• Wiper ffastLever at position 3.

• Flick wwipeLever at position 4.

• Automatic wwash/wipe ffacilityTo turn on wipers and washer, pull levertowards steering wheel to position 5. Release lever –The washer stops and the wipers carry onfor about 4 seconds.

Rain ssensor*If the vehicle is fitted with a rain sensorand the intermittent wipe is activated thissensor is in charge of adjusting automati-cally the duration of the intervals to theamount of rain.Position A of the lever for the windscreenwipers is used to individually adjust thesensitivity of the rain sensor.After switching off the ignition, the rainsensor needs to be switched on again. Todo that the intermittent wipe needs to beswitched off and switched on again.

LEO-027



Headlight wwasher ssystem*When the main or dipped beam is on, thelenses are washed every time the wind-screen is washed.At regular intervals, such as when fillingthe tank, the dirt on the lenses (insects)should be removed.



Wiper bblades

Warning

• The wwiper bblades mmust bbe iingood ccondition ffor cclear vvisibility.

• In oorder tto pprevent sstreaks oonthe wwindscreen yyou sshould ccleanthe wwiper bblades rregularly wwith aawindow ccleaning pproduct. IIf tthewindows aare pparticularly ddirty, ee.g.insect rremains, aa ssponge oor cclothshould bbe uused tto cclean ttheblades.

• Change tthe wwiper bblades oonceor ttwice aa yyear ffor ssafety rreasons.Wiper bblades mmay bbe ppurchasedfrom TTechnical SService CCentres.

When iit iis ffreezing, ccheck tthat tthewiper bblades aare nnot ffrozen tto ttheglass bbefore sswitching tthe wwipers oonfor tthe ffirst ttime.If the wiper blades drag, it may be causedby one of the following:

• If the vehicle has been washed in anautomatic car wash, residual wax may beleft on the windscreen. This wax can onlybe removed with special detergent.Consult a Technical Service Centre formore information.The blades will not drag if you use a waxdissolving windscreen cleaner. Greasesolvents will not work.

• Damaged wiper blades can also drag.In this case the blades should berenewed.

• The blades are set at an incorrect angle.Have the angle checked and, if necessary,adjusted by a Technical Service Centre.

Changing wwiper bblades

Taking tthe wwiper bblade ooff

• Hinge the wiper arm up and positionthe blade perpendicular to the wiper arm.

• Press the retaining spring in the direc-tion of arrow A.

• Detach the wiper blade in the directionof arrow B and then remove from the armin the opposite direction.

Securing tthe wwiper bbladeThe retaining spring must engage audiblyin the wiper arm.When fitting wiper blades with mouldedwind deflectors one should ensure thatthe deflector is pointing downwards.

B1H-052



Rear-view mmirrors

Adjusting mmirrorsThe rear view mirrors should always beadjusted properly before moving off sothat good vision to the rear is obtained.

Anti-dazzle iinterior mmirrorThe lever on the lower edge of the mirrorshould be pointing to the rear when thebasic setting is made.To set the anti-dazzle position, pull leverforwards.Exterior mmirrors ccontrolled mmechani-cally ffrom iinside are adjusted with theknob in the door trim panel.

Automatic* aanti-dazzle mmirrorAdjust interior mirror by hand.If the ignition is switched on the interiormirror automatically darkens dependingon the light from behind (i.e. a headlight).When you engage the reverse gear or putthe selector lever on R the mirror returnsto its original position (is no longer dark).

Electrically aadjustable mmirrors*Electrically adjustable mirrors* are set bypressing the edge of the knob A in the dri-ver’s door trim.The surface of the mirror may be angledupwards, downwards, to the left or theright, as required.With swivel knob (A) select the driver orpassenger wing mirrors.N – Neutral positionR – Driver’s mirrorL – Passenger’s mirrorWhen you adjust the left mirror the rightone moves in time, and a separate adjust-ment of the right mirror should not normallybe necessary. If you wish to adjust it sepa-rately, activate the right mirror. You shouldnow be able to adjust it.If the electric adjustment fails, the mirrorscan be adjusted manually by pressing onthe surface.

LEO-014C



Note ffor vvehicles wwith cconvex ooraspherical ooutside mmirrors **Convex (curved outwards) mirrorsenlarge the field of view but they makeobjects look smaller. These mmirrors aareonly oof llimited uuse iin eestimating hhowfar aaway aa ffollowing vvehicle iis.Aspherical exterior mirrors have a mirrorsurface with different curvature. Thiswide-angle mirror increases the area ofvision even more so than conventionalconvex mirrors. Their uusefulness iis aalsolimited wwhen jjudging tthe ddistance ttovehicles aapproaching ffrom bbehind.

Mirror hheating*The electrically operated outside mirrorsare heated as long as the heated rear win-dow is switched on. The ignition must beswitched on for this purpose.

Folding eexterior mmirrors iinThe exterior mirrors can be folded in.To do this pull mirror housing towardsvehicle.

Note

• Before putting the vehicle through anautomatic washing plant, the mirrorsshould be folded in to prevent them frombecoming damaged.

Folding eexterior mmirrors bback

WarningWhen ffolding tthe mmirror bback ooutensure tthat yyour ffingers aare nnottrapped bbetween tthe mmirror aandthe bbracket –– DDanger oof iinjury!



Electric ffolding wwing mmirrors*Use control A to select the passenger ordriver’s wing mirror, or the fold-away func-tion, as well as mirror adjustment (seediagram).N – Neutral positionR – Driver’s wing mirrorL – Passenger’s wing mirrorP – Folding away of wing mirrorsThe fold-away position is recommended,for example, when parking or driving incramped conditions.To fold aaway tthe wwing mmirrors, startingfrom positions L, R or N, select position Pwith control A.To uunfold tthe wwing mmirrors ((use pposi-tion), do the opposite, from P to L, R or N.

NoteIf the mirror housing is moved by an exter-nal force (e.g. knocked when maneuver-ing) the mirrors must be folded right inelectrically. Under nno ccircumstancesmust tthe mmirror housing be adjusted byhand as the operation of the mirror mightbe affected. To place the mirrors in useposition, using control A, they will notwork for about 15 seconds.Be careful not to damage the mirrorswhen using control A.LEO-014B


Front sseats

The correct adjustment of the seats isimportant for:– reaching the controls safely and quickly– relaxed low-fatigue body position– maximum pprotection ffrom tthe sseat

belts aand tthe AAir BBag SSystem.

Warning

• For tthis rreason tthe ffront sseatsshould nnot bbe ppushed ttoo cclose ttothe ssteering wwheel oor tthe iinstru-ment ppanel.

• Your ffeet sshould rremain iin tthefootwell wwhile tthe vvehicle iis iinmotion –– nnever rresting oon ttheinstrument ppanel oor sseats.

Please adjust your seat as detailed on thenext pages. Please also note the basicpositions for the driver’s and passengerseats on this page.

Driver’s sseatWe recommend that you position the dri-ver’s seat as follows:– Set the driver’s seat forwards/back-

wards in such a way that the pedals canbe fully depressed with a slightlyangled leg.

– Set the backrest in such a way that it isfully against your back and that you canreach the upper point of the steeringwheel with your arms at a slight angle.

WarningNo iitems sshould bbe kkept iin tthefootwell, aas tthey ccould bblock tthepedals iin tthe ccase oof aa ssuddenbraking mmanoeuvre.You wwould nno llonger bbe aable ttobrake, cchange ggear oor aaccelerate!

Front ppassenger sseatWe recommend that you position the frontpassenger seat as follows:– Backrest in an upright position.– Place the feet in the footwell in a com-

fortable position.– At the same time push tthe sseat bback aas

far aas ppossible.

SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.57

2.58 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT


Driver aand ffront ppassenger sseats(manual aadjustment)

1 –– To mmove sseat bbackwards aandforwards

Lift lever and move seat. Then releaselever and move seat further so that thecatch engages.

WarningFor ssafety rreasons tthe ddriver’s sseatmust oonly bbe mmoved bbackwards oorforwards wwhen tthe vvehicle iis ssta-tionary.

2 –– AAdjusting bbackrestTake weight off backrest and turn knob byhand.

WarningDo nnot llower tthe bbackrest ttoo ffarwhen oon tthe mmove bbecause ttheseatbelts aare nno llonger ffully eeffec-tive.

3 –– AAdjusting llumbar ssupport* Turning the wheel will arch the lumbarsupport cushion to greater or lesserdegree. This prevents the fatigue thataccompanies long journeys.

4 –– AAdjusting sseat hheight*By “pumping” the lateral lever the seatcan be lifted or lowered.Lifting: Lift/pump lever up from baseposition.Lowering: Press/pump the lever downfrom the base position.

Warning

• For ssafety rreasons tthe hheight oofthe ddriver’s sseat mmust oonly bbeadjusted wwhen tthe vvehicle iis ssta-tionary.

• Be ccareful wwhen aadjusting ttheseat hheight! CCareless aand uuncon-trolled aadjustment ccan ccauseinjuries.

• The eelectrical aadjustment oof ttheseats wwill aalso ffunction wwhen ttheignition iis ooff oor wwhen tthe kkey hhasbeen wwithdrawn ffully.For tthis rreason cchildren sshouldnever bbe lleft uunattended iin tthevehicle.

B45-017C



Driver aand ffront ppassenger sseats(electrical aadjustment)*The seats are electrically adjusted usingthe switches A and B.The seats can also be adjusted in this waywhen the ignition is switched off.Using the handwheel C the lumbar ssup-port is set mechanically. Please also referto the description (Pos. 3) of the manualadjustment.

Warning

• For ssafety rreasons tthe hheight oofthe ddriver’s sseat mmust oonly bbeadjusted wwhen tthe vvehicle iis ssta-tionary.

• Be ccareful wwhen aadjusting ttheseat hheight. CCareless aand uuncon-trolled aadjustment ccan ccauseinjuries.

• The eelectrical aadjustment oof ttheseats wwill aalso ffunction wwhen ttheignition iis sswitched ooff oor wwhenthe kkey hhas bbeen wwithdrawn ccom-pletely.For tthis rreason, cchildren sshouldnever bbe lleft uunattended iin tthevehicle.

Switch AA*The seat is adjusted in the correspondingarrow direction by pressing the switch:1 – Seat forwards / back2 – Front seat cushion up / down3 – Rear seat cushion up / down2 and 3 at the same time – Seat up / down

B45-180CB45-182C



Switch BB*The backrest is adjusted in the corre-sponding arrow direction by pressing theswitch:Arrow 1: Backrest comes forwardArrow 2: Backrest moves back

WarningDo nnot hhave tthe bbackrest ttoo ffarforward wwhile tthe vvehicle iis iinmotion aas tthis mmay aaffect ttheeffectiveness oof tthe sseat bbelts.

B45-181C



Head rrestraints*

The head restraints are height adjustableand should be set to suit the size of theoccupant. Correctly adjusted headrestraints together with the seat beltsoffer effective protection. The front headrestraints can also be adjusted to a differ-ent angle.

Adjusting hheight

• Grip sides of head restraint with bothhands and pull up or push down.

• The best protection is obtained whenthe upper edge of restraint is at lleast ateye level or higher.

Removing aand iinstallingTo remove, pull restraints up to the stop,press button (arrow) and at the same timetake restraints out.To remove the rear head restraint first pullthe backrest forwards a little.To install again, push the restraint rodsinto the guides until they are heard toengage. You do not need to press the key.

B45-016CB1S-017P



Armrest*

Front aarmrest*The armrest can be adjusted to severaldifferent positions.To adjust, press the button in the frontend of the armrest A and fold down therest. Then raise the rest notch by notchuntil the desired position has beenreached.There is a stowage compartment in thearmrest. To open, press button B.When the armrest is folded down, free-dom of movement. For this reason, thearmrest should not be folded down whendriving in town traffic

B45-022C



6 –– SSeat hheating* ffor lleft sseatThe cushion and backrest of the frontseats can be heated electrically when theignition is on.The heating is switched on and regulatedto your comfort with the knurled wheel.To switch heating off, turn knurled wheelto the basic position (0).

7 –– SSeat hheating* ffor rright sseatThe cushion and backrest of the frontseats can be heated electrically when theignition is on.The heating is switched on and regulatedto your comfort with the knurled wheel.To switch heating off, turn knurled wheelto the basic position (0).

The steering column can be adjusted atwill both for reach and for height. Pressthe lever A beneath the steering columndown and move the steering wheel to thedesired position. Then press the leverfirmly up again.

Warning

• The ssteering ccolumn mmay oonlybe aadjusted wwhilst tthe vvehicle iisstationary.

• For ssafety rreasons, tthe llevermust aalways bbe ffirmly ppressed uup,so tthat tthe pposition oof tthe ssteeringcolumn ddoes nnot ssuddenly cchangewhile tthe vvehicle iis iin mmotion.

Heated sseats* Adjustable ssteering ccolumn*

TO8-018 TO8-018A

2.64 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT


The mmovement oof tthe ppedals mmust nnotbe rrestricted!For tthis rreason, ddo nnot llocate aanyitems iin tthe ffootwell wwhich ccould rrollor sslide uunderneath tthe ppedals.Around the pedal area there should notbe any foot mats or other additional floorcovering materials:

• In the case of defects in the brake sys-tem, a greater pedal travel may be neces-sary.

• It should always be possible to depressthe clutch and accelerator pedals fully.

• All pedals must be able to return,unhindered, to their rest positions.For these reasons, the only foot matswhich may be used are those which leavethe pedal area completely free and whichare prevented from slipping.

WarningUnder nno ccircumstances sshouldany iitems bbe kkept iin tthe ffootwell,as tthey ccould bblock tthe ppedals iincase oof aa ssudden bbraking mmanoeu-vre.You wwould nno llonger bbe aable ttobrake, cchange ggear oor aaccelerate!

In the interests of good handling ensurethat the load (persons and luggage) isdistributed evenly. Heavy items shouldalways be carried as near to the rear axleas possible or better still, between theaxles.Stale air escapes through ventilationopenings in the side trim* of the luggagecompartment. For this reason, it is best tokeep these openings uncovered.

Pedals Luggage ccompartment

SEATS AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––2.65


Warning nnotes

Warning

• The ppermissible ppayloads aandGVW mmust nnot bbe eexceeded –– sseechapter ""Technical DData".

• It sshould bbe nnoted tthat wwhentransporting hheavy iitems tthe hhan-dling wwill cchange ddue tto tthe ddis-placement oof tthe ccentre oof ggravity.Driving sstyle aand sspeed mmust,therefore, bbe aaltered tto ssuit.

• The lload mmust bbe sstowed iin ssucha wway tthat nno iitems ccan ffly fforwardif tthe bbrakes aare aapplied ssuddenly– uuse tthe llashing eeyes* iif nneces-sary.

• No ppeople oor cchildren aare ttotravel iin tthe lloading aarea oor ttheboot. AAll ppassengers mmust wwearseat bbelts. SSee ""Seat bbelts" cchap-ter.

• Never ddrive wwith tthe bbootlid/tailgate oopen oor nnot pproperlyclosed. EExhaust ggas ccould tthen bbedrawn iinto tthe vvehicle iinterior.

Lashing eeyes*On the saloon, four eyelets are providedin the luggage compartment for securingitems of luggage. There are two eyelets inthe front sides of the luggage compart-ment, one left and one right. The othertwo eyelets are near the loading edge(see illustration). The lashing eyes comply with StandardDIN 75410.

B45-023C



Rear sshelf

Clothing can be placed on the shelfbehind the rear backrests.Please note that the field of vision of therear view mirror can be obstructed byclothes.As ventilation of the vehicle interior takesplace via the boot, the full-width slotsbetween shelf and rear window must notbe obstructed.

WarningWhen tthe vvehicle iis mmoving nnopersons, aanimals oor hheavy iitemsof lluggage aare tto bbe ccarried oon ttheshelf –– tthey aare aa ddanger wwhenbrakes aare aapplied ssuddenly oorwhen vvehicle iis iinvolved iin aanaccident!

Furthermore tthe hheating eelements oofthe rrear wwindscreen ccould bbe ddam-aged bby aarticles rrubbing aagainstthem.

The rear shelf may be provided with a cur-tain* that acts as a sun shade.

UnrollingTake the mat by the central buckle andraise it until it is in its housings on theside mountings.

Rolling iit uupPull the buckle upwards to separate thecurtain from its housings and gentlyallow it to roll up. Do nnot llet iit rroll uupsuddenly!

WarningIn uunfavourable cconditions, aatnight, dduring rrain oor ffog, yyoushould rroll tthe ccurtain uup, oother-wise rrear vvisibility, aand tthereforesafety, wwill bbe rreduced.



Increasing bboot sspace*You may tip the rear seats forwards toincrease the boot space: if it is a split seateach half can be tipped separately.Headrests must be removed before lower-ing the back seat*. To do so you will needto push the back of the seat forward a lit-tle. See the "Headrests" chapter.Place the safety belts through thetongues in the housing provided for thispurpose.The front seats must be placed so that theback seats do not collide with them, toavoid damage.

Folding ddown tthe sseat

• Pull on the tape (arrow 1) to raise thecushion a little and then pull it forwardsas far as possible. Then raise the rear partof the cushion (arrow 2).

Rear sseat

B1J-007DTO2-003



• Pull the release lever on the backrest inthe direction of the arrow (or both leversat the same time if the seat is not split)and lower the backrest.

Raising tthe sseat

• First lift up the backrest.

• Lift the cushion and then push it back-wards until it fits into place. When you do,pull tthe mmiddle sseat bbelt oout, oother-wise iit wwill bbe ttrapped bbetween ttheseat aand tthe bbackrest aand yyou wwill nnotbe aable tto uuse iit.Also mmake ssure tthe sside bbelts aare nnottrapped bby tthe bbackrest.

WarningThe rrear sseat bbackrest mmust bbeproperly eengaged sso tthat aarticlesin tthe lluggage aarea ddo nnot sslideforward iif tthe bbrakes aare aappliedsuddenly.

B1J-008DB1J-004D



When loads are to be carried on the roof,the following should be noted:

• As the rain channels are moulded intothe roof for streamlining reasons, the nor-mal type of roof rack cannot be used. Toavoid risks we advise that only the crossbars provided by the factory are used.

• These cross bars are the basis for acomplete roof load carrying system. Forsafety reasons when carrying luggage,bicycles, surf boards, skis and boats, theappropriate special adapters arerequired.

• The roof rack system must be installedaccording to the enclosed instructions.Open the plastic covers to secure the feetof the rack to the roof.When fitting the feet to the roof make surethey fit exactly into the special groovesand properly attach to the appropriatepart of the groove.

• Distribute the load evenly. Each crossbar may carry 40 kg if loaded uniformlyover the full length. The permissible roofload (including the carrier system) of 75kg and the permissible gross vehicleweight must not be exceeded. See chap-ter "Technical Data".

Warning

• When ccarrying hheavy oor llargeobjects oon tthe rroof, bbear iin mmindthat tthe vvehicle hhandling cchangesdue tto tthe ddisplacement oof tthecentre oof ggravity aand tthe iincreasedarea eexposed tto tthe wwind. Driving sstyle aand sspeed mmust bbeadapted tto aallow ffor tthis.

• If your vehicle has a sliding/lifting sunroof make sure it does not collide with theload.

Roof rrack*



Press forcefully on the cover on themarked side in the direction of the arrow.Lift the aforementioned cover until thereis a 90° angle in relation to the roof of thevehicle.Then place the roof rack* in the mountingfor roof racks (note instructions includedin the roof rack*).To close proceed in reverse. Ensure thatthe cover is well closed. It must be flushto the roof channels.

LEO-045



Front aashtray

OpeningPush the front of the ashtray B. See figure.

EmptyingTake the ashtray by the side groves (A)pulling it upwards.

ReplacingPush in.

ClosingIt can only be closed by pressing on thelower ppart oof tthe aashtray (C).

Rear

OpeningOpen the lid.

EmptyingRemove the inside by pulling it upwards,with the lid open.

ReplacingPush in and downwards.

Ashtrays

B8L-067B8L-098



The cigarette lighter is switched on bypushing in the element. When the heatingelement glows, the lighter springs outautomatically – pull it out immediatelyand use it.

WarningExcercise ccaution wwhen uusing tthecigarette llighter. IIt ccan ccauseburns.The ccigarette llighter aand tthesocket aalso wwork wwhen tthe iignitionis sswitched ooff aand tthe kkeyremoved.For tthis rreason cchildren sshouldnever bbe lleft iin tthe vvehicle oon ttheirown.

The 12-Volt ssocket of the lighter can beused for other electrical accessories witha capacity of up to 120 Watts. When theengine is not running this will howeverdischarge the battery. For further informa-tion see “Accessories”.

Electric ssocket iin tthe bboot*The electric socket is located in the wheelarea on the left side.It can be used for electrical accessorieswith a maximum capacity of 150 W. Whenthe engine is not running, however, it willdischarge the battery. For further informa-tion see the chapter on “Accessories”.

WarningFor ssafety rreasons tthe gglove ccom-partment llid sshould aalways bbeclosed wwhile ddriving.

Lift the catch in order to open the passen-ger side glove compartment*.

Stowage bbox wwith CCD-Changer*Depending on which car radio they areequipped with, some vehicles have a CD-Changer* for up to 6 compact disks in thestowage box.

Cigarette llighter/electric ssocket Stowage bbox

TO8-020



Vehicle wwallet sstowagecompartmentThis stowage box is intended for the vehi-cle wallet.

NoteIf the vehicle wallet does not fit in thiscompartment you may store it in the glovecompartment on the passenger side or inany of the stowage boxes on the doors.

Located in the central console.

OpeningPress the edge of the drink can holder andit will spring open.

ClosingPush the drink can holder closed.

WarningThe ddrink ccan hholder sshouldalways rremain cclosed wwhile ddri-ving tto rreduce rrisk iin tthe eevent oofsudden bbraking oor aan aaccident.

Drink ccan hholder*

LEO-022


Warning

• For rroad ssafety iit iis iimportantthat aall wwindows aare ffree oof iice,snow aand mmist. OOnly tthen ccanclear vvision bbe gguaranteed.You sshould ttherefore ffamiliariseyourself wwith tthe ccorrect ooperationof tthe hheating aand vventilation ssys-tem aas wwell aas rremoving ddamp-ness aand ffrost ffrom tthe wwindows.

• The hhighest ppossible llevel oofheating aand qquick ddefrosting oofthe wwindows ccan oonly bbe aachievedwhen tthe eengine hhas aachieved iitsoperating ttemperature.

VentsThe illustration shows the air vents on thedashboard.Cooled, heated or unheated air comes outof all the vents.All vents can be adjusted by swivellingcontrol C (see illustration on next page).Vents 3 and 4 open and close separately,with knurled wheels at the side.The air flow from the vents can beadjusted horizontally or vertically.

Heating aand vventilation

LEO-023

2.74 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CLIMATE CONTROL

CLIMATE CONTROL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.75


Controls

A –– TTemperature sselectorThe temperature can be graduallyincreased by turning the control clock-wise.

B –– BBlowerAir flow can be adjusted to four speeds. In position 0 the fan is switched off.

C –– SSwivel kknob ffor aair ddistribution

Air fflow ffor foot wwell

Vents 5 are opened.Vents 3 and 4 must be closed for all theair to go to the feet.

Air fflow ffor tthe windscreen

In this position you cannot connect posi-tion D for air recirculation.Additionally, vents 3 can be used to directhot air to the side windows.Vents 1 and 2 are opened.

Air fflow ffrom the vvents

Vents 1, 2 and 5 are closed. The air comesout of vents 3 and 4.In the above positions there is alwayssome air leaking out of the other vents.

D –– AAir rrecirculationIn this mode, no air is drawn from outsideand air is drawn in from the vehicle inte-rior and recirculated.The air recirculation function stops pol-luted air from outside entering the vehi-cle. You sshould nnot ddrive ffor ttoo llongwith tthis mmode sswitched oon.If tthe wwindows ssteam uup yyou sshouldpress tthe aair ccirculation bbutton aagainimmediately tto sswitch iit ooff oor sselectthe pposition ..

TO2-001

2.76 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CLIMATE CONTROL


Adjustment iinstructions

Defrosting wwindscreen aand ssidewindows

• Rotary switch B to stage III.

• Rotary regulator A turned fully to right.

• Rotary regulator C to ....................

• Adjust vents 3 so that additional warmair can be directed to the side windows.

Demisting wwindscreen aand ssidewindowsWhen the windows mist up due to high airhumidity, e.g. when it is raining, we rec-ommend the following settings:

• Rotary switch B to stage II or III.

• Rotary regulator A, if necessary, intoheating range.

• Rotary regulator C as required, betweenand .

• Additional warm air can be directed tothe side windows via vents 3.

Heating iinterior qquickly

• Rotary switch B to level III.


• Turn control A as far clockwise as pos-sible.

• Open vents 3.

Heating iinterior ccomfortablyWhen the windows are clear and thedesired temperature has been reached werecommend the following settings:

• Rotary switch B to level II or III.

• Rotary regulator A at the desired heatoutput.

• Rotary regulator C to ...................

• Set vents 3.

Ventilation ((fresh aair operation)With the following settings, unheatedfresh air flows from vents 3 and 4:

• Rotary switch B to desired stage (levelIIII for maximum air flow).

• Rotary regulator A anti–clockwise tothe stop


• Vents 3 and 4 open.If required, regulator C can be turned toanother position.

CLIMATE CONTROL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.77


Air cconditioning*

General nnotes

• To ensure that the heating and ventila-tion can work properly, the air inlet infront of the windscreen should be keptfree from ice, snow and leaves.

• To prevent the windows from steamingup the fan should always be left on lowwhen you are driving slowly.

• Press button D to stop polluted air fromoutside getting into the vehicle. Do nnotdrive ttoo ffast iin tthis pposition tto sstopthe wwindows ffrom ssteaming uup.The air and pollen* filter removes impuri-ties from the air (e.g. pollen, dust, etc.).Only put the rotary switch to 0 when theair outside is polluted by gases.

• The pollen and dust filter elementsshould be changed in accordance withthe Inspection and Maintenance Plan, toavoid a reduction in heat and de-icingcapacity.

Warning



2.78 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CLIMATE CONTROL


The air conditioner is a combined coolingand heating system which provides themaximum possible comfort all the yearround.The cooling system only works when theengine is running, the ambient tempera-ture is above about +5°C and the ventila-tor is set to positions I to IIII.When the cooling system is switched on itreduces not only the temperature insidethe vehicle but also the air humidity mak-ing the vehicle occupants feel more com-fortable, when there is a high level ofhumidity.

Control eelements

A –– TTemperature sselectorTo tthe rright – increases heat outputTo tthe lleft – decreases heat outputIf the air conditioning is connected thecooling capacity is increased if you turnthe regulator to the right.

B –– BBlowerAir throughput can be adjusted in fourstages.In position 0 the blower is switched off,but air is let in from the outside. If youwant to stop polluted (smelly) air comingin from outside press switch E (air circula-tion).

WarningAs tthis mmay mmake tthe wwindowssteam uup yyou sshould nnot ddrive ffortoo llong iin tthis pposition.

C –– AAir ddistribution

Air fflow ffor footwell

Vents 5 are opened.All vents 3 and 4 must be opened todirect all the air flow to the feet.

Air fflow ffor tthe windscreen aarea

Vents 3 can be used to direct air to theside windows.Vents 1 and 2 are opened.

Air fflow oof the vvents

Vents 1, 2 and 5 are closed. The air comesout of vents 3 and 4.In the positions mentioned above there isalways a leak of air to the remainingvents.

TO2-002

CLIMATE CONTROL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.79


D –– AAir cconditioner oon/off The system can be switched on by press-ing button D. The system is switched off by pressing thebutton again.

E –– AAir rrecirculationAir recirculation is connected by pressingbutton E. It is disconnected by pressingthe same button again.Air recirculation may work with or withoutthe air conditioning.

WarningHowever, yyou sshould oonly ddrive iinthis mmode ffor aa sshort ttime, aas nnoair iis ddrawn ffrom ooutside, aand tthewindows mmay ssteam uup.

Button E may not be used if the rotaryregulator C is near the position .

Air vventsDepending on the position of rotary regu-lators A, B, C and buttons D and E, heatedor unheated fresh air or cooled air flowsfrom all vents.The vents are controlled by the rotary reg-ulator C.Vents 3 and 4 can be opened or closedseparately:Knurled wheel turned up – vent open.Knurled wheel turned down – vent closed.The height of the air flow can be modifiedby moving the grille of vents 3 and 4.The rear footwell vents are suppliedtogether with vents 5.

LEO-024

2.80 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CLIMATE CONTROL


Defrosting wwindscreen aand ssidewindows

• Rotary regulator B to level III.


• Rotary regulator A completely to the right

• Close vents 4.

• Open vents 3.

• Turn control B to level II or III.

• If necessary, turn control A upwardsslightly into the heat area.

• If needed, turn rotary regulator C tobetween and .

• You can also use vents 3 to direct hotair onto the side windows.

Quick hheating oof tthe iinterior

• Put rotary regulator B to position III.

• Put rotary regulator C to ..............

• Turn switch A clockwise as far as possi-ble.

• Open vents 3.

Heating iinterior ccomfortablyWhen the windows are clear and thedesired temperature has been reached werecommend the following settings:

• Rotary regulator B to level II or III.

• Turn switch A to the required level ofheat.

• Put switch C to ...........................

• Adjust vents 3 as required.

Ventilation ((fresh aair)With the following settings, unheatedfresh air flows from vents 3 and 4:

• Rotary switch B to the required level(level III for maximum air flow).

• Regulator A as far to the right as possi-ble.

• Rotary switch C to .......................

• Open vents 3 and 4.If necessary switch C can also be set toother positions.

CLIMATE CONTROL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.81


Maximum ccooling

• Close all windows and sliding/raisingroof.

• Switch B to speed IIII.

• Switch A to the left.


• Open vents 3 and 4.

• Connect the air conditioning by press-ing switch D.

• Press switch E to connect air recirculation.

WarningThis rrunning mmode ddraws aanduses tthe aair ffrom iinside tthe iinte-rior. TThis mmode sshould oonly bbeconnected ffor aa sshort ttime, aas nnofresh aair iis ttaken ffrom ooutside.

You sshould nnot ssmoke iin tthe ccar wwhenthe aair rrecirculation mmode iis iin oopera-tion.

Ideal ccooling

• Rotary switch B to speed II or III (idealcooling levels).

• Rotary switch A as far to the left as pos-sible. The temperature can then bechanged at will by moving the switch tothe right.

• Rotary switch C to .......................

• Open vents 3 and 4.

• Press button D.

• Adjust vents 3 and 4 so that the air isblown backwards over the driver’s head.In this mode air is taken from outside andcooled.

2.82 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CLIMATE CONTROL


General nnotes

• When the outside temperature is lowthe fan will not switch on until the coolingliquid has reached the right temperature,unless the fan is manually switched on

.

• The air inlet in front of the windscreenshould be kept free from ice, snow anddead leaves to avoid hindrance to theheating or air conditioning systems.

• In automatic gear box versions, thekick-down mechanism briefly switches offthe air conditioning compressor whenmoving down a gear, so the engine cankeep up full capacity.

• If the cooling liquid gets too hot thecompressor switches off when the engineis subjected to great effort, to guaranteeperfect engine cooling.

• At low outside temperatures (less than+5°C) the refrigeration group (compres-sor) is automatically switched off, andmay not even be switched on manually(with D key).

• When the compressor is on the insidetemperature and humidity of the car isreduced. This stops the windows fromsteaming up.

• Best results are obtained from the airconditioning if the windows and sun roof*remain closed.However if the inside of the car is over-heated, e.g. because it has been in thesun, the cooling process can be speededup by briefly opening the windows.

• When it is very hot or humid, water maycondense on the evaporator and dripdown to form a puddle under the car. Thisis perfectly normal and does not meanthere is a leak.

• The dust and pollen filter separatesimpurities from the air (e.g. dust, pollenetc.). If the air is polluted by gases the airrecirculation mode should be connected.

• The dust and pollen filter elements*should be changed in accordance withthe Maintenance and Inspection Plan, toprevent a loss in the air conditioningcapacity.

• If yyou tthink tthe aair cconditioningmay bbe ddamaged, sswitch iit ooff aandhave iit cchecked iimmediately aat aaTechnical SService CCentre.Only tthen sshould yyou sswitch iit oonagain.

• All rrepairs oof SSEAT aair cconditioningmodules rrequire sspecialised iinforma-tion aand ttools.So mmake ssure yyou gget iin ttouch wwithyour llocal TTechnical SService CCentre iifanything ggoes wwrong.

CLIMATE CONTROL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.83


Using aair cconditioner economically

• In cooling operation the air conditionercompressor places demands on theengine and therefore influences the fuelconsumption.

• If the inside temperature is very highafter the car has been parked in the sun,we recommend that you open doors orwindows briefly to enable the hot air toescape.

• The air conditioner should not beswitched on during a journey if the win-dows or sliding/tilting roof are open.

• If the desired interior temperature canbe attained without switching on the airconditioner, the fresh air operationshould be selected.

2.84 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CLIMATE CONTROL


Climatronic*

Warning



VentsThe vents are adjusted automatically ormanually, depending on the operatingsystem chosen.The diagram shows the vents around theinstrument panel.Normal, hot and cold air comes out of thevents.Vents 3 and 4 may be opened or closedindependently by means of the knurledwheels on either side.They can be directed horizontally or verti-cally.

LEO-025

CLIMATE CONTROL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.85


The Climatronic* system automaticallyprovides a uniform temperature inside thevehicle.To do so it automatically adjusts the tem-perature of the air released, the fan revo-lutions (air flow) and the air distribution.This automatic adjustment may be modi-fied manually if necessary.The illustration shows the controls on theinstrument panel. To the left of the screenyou can see the temperature and theautomatic functions selected, and to theright the manual ones.Normal rrecommended aadjustment fforall sseasons oof tthe yyear:After switching the ignition on.

• select tthe ttemperature oof 222 °°C ((71 °°F)and

• press tthe AAUTO kkeyWith this adjustment you will very quicklyachieve a pleasant environment insidethe car.This setting should only be adjusted foryour own personal comfort.

Controls

Automatic(normal mmode)

The temperature, volume and air distribu-tion are automatically adjusted to provideand maintain the required temperature ina short time. Any variation in outside tem-perature is quickly compensated.

De-frostingThe windscreen is quickly de-frosted orfreed from moisture.The temperature is automatically regu-lated. The maximum air flow comes fromvents 1 and 2.

Cooling ssystemon/off

You can switch the cooling system (com-pressor) off to save fuel. However thismay reduce comfort. If the heat inside thecar becomes too high, just switch thecompressor on again or press AUTO.

TO8-027

2.86 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CLIMATE CONTROL


– ++ TTemperature sselectionThe temperature can be adjusted between18°C (64°F) and 29°C (84°F). In theextreme positions of “LO” and “HI” thereis no temperature adjustment. The deviceconstantly provides maximum heat orcool.The ttemperature ddisplay mmay bbechanged ffrom °°C tto °°F aas ffollows:Press key and keep it pressed. Thenpress key + on the temperature selection.

– ++ FFan rrevolutionsThis key can be used to increase or lowerthe automatic number of revolutions (airvolume) of the fan. When you press it“man” appears on the right of the dis-play. The revolution speed is shown insegments or bars next to the symbol .If you press the key when the fan is at itslowest level the system switches itself off.To switch oon the air conditioning againyou must press the AUTO button, oneof the temperature selection buttons orthe fan button with the positive symbol.You do not normally need to disconnectthe device from the fan.

– AAir ccirculationIn this mode no air is drawn from outside,and the inside air is circulated around thecar. This stops polluted air from coming infrom the outside. Do not have it on thismode for too long.

If tthe wwindows ssteam uup ddisconnectthe aair ccirculation mmode bby ppressingthe aair ccirculation bbutton aagain oor bbyselecting aa pposition ..

NoteIf the air conditioner compressor tem-porarily switches itself off, e.g. because ofover exertion of the engine, press the aircirculation button again.

Air ddistribution kkeysThe programmed air distribution may bealtered by using buttons , and .These buttons may be used in combina-tion or alone. When you press one ofthese buttons “man” appears on the dis-play.

– AAir ffor tthe wwindowsIf you press this button all the air comesout of vents 1, 2 and 3. Unlike the mode the air volume does not change.

– AAir ffrom tthe ddashboard aandrear ccentral cconsole

All the air from vents 3 and 4 comes out ofthe dashboard and the rear central con-sole.

– AAir ffor tthe ffootwellAll the air flow is directed to vents 5 andthe vents under the front seats.If you want to connect automatic air distri-bution again, you will have to switch offthe corresponding functions one by oneor press the AUTO button, or .

CLIMATE CONTROL –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.87


General nnotes

• When the outside temperature is low thefan will not switch itself on until the coolanthas reached the right temperature, unlessthe fan is manually switched on .

• The air inlet in front of the windscreenshould be kept free of ice, snow and deadleaves to avoid hindrance to the heatingor cooling systems.

• In automatic gear box versions, thekick-down mechanism briefly switches offthe air conditioning compressor whenmoving down a gear, so the engine cankeep up full capacity.

•If the coolant overheats the compressorswitches itself off when the engine isunder a great effort, to guarantee perfectengine cooling.

• At low outside temperatures (below +5 °C) the refrigeration group (compres-sor) is automatically switched off, andcannot be switched on manually .

• With the compressor on both the insidetemperature and humidity of the car arereduced. This stops the windows fromsteaming up.

• Best results are obtained from theClimatronic with the windows and sunroof* closed.However if the inside of the car is over-heated, e.g. because it has been in thesun, the cooling process can be speededup by briefly opening the windows.

• When it is very hot or humid outside,water may condense on the evaporatorand drip down to form a puddle under thecar. This is perfectly normal and does notmean there is a leak.

• The dust and pollen filter separatesimpurities from the air (e.g. dust, pollenetc.). If the air is polluted by gases the airrecirculation mode should be connected.

• The dust and pollen filter elementsshould be changed in accordance withthe Maintenance and Inspection Plan, toprevent a loss in the air conditioningcapacity.

• If yyou tthink tthe CClimatronic ssystemmay bbe ddamaged, sswitch iit ooff aand hhaveit cchecked iimmediately aat aa TTechnicalService CCentre.Only tthen sshould yyou sswitch iit oonagain.

• All rrepairs oof SSEAT CClimatronic mmod-ules rrequire sspecialised iinformationand ttools.So mmake ssure yyou gget iin ttouch wwithyour llocal TTechnical SService CCentre iifanything ggoes wwrong.

2.88 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CLIMATE CONTROL


Operating ffaults

• If the cooling system does not work, itmay be due to one of the following:– temperature is below +5 °C.– the cooling system compressor has

switched itself off temporarily due to thecoolant temperature being too high.

– the fuses have blown.Check the fuse and, if necessary,replace it. If the fuse was not the cause,have the Climatronic checked.

• If the cooling output drops, have the sys-tem checked.


Reverse gear may only be engaged whenthe vehicle is stationary. When engine isrunning, depress clutch fully and wait afew seconds before moving gear lever, toprevent grating noises.When reverse gear is engaged with igni-tion on, the reversing lights come on.Some model versions may have 6 gears*.Its layout is indicated on the selectorlever.

NoteFor ssafety rreasons, ddo nnot rrest yyourhand oon tthe ggear llever while ddriving.

Driving pprogrammes ssoftwareThe gearbox management is fitted withseveral driving programmes. According tothe driving style or to the momentary situ-ation, an economy, low-consumption, ora more “sporty” programme will beselected.The programme is selected automati-cally depending on the movement of theaccelerator pedal.If the accelerator pedal is moved slowly,or at a normal rate, the gearbox will shiftinto a higher gear earlier, and down into alower gear later to reduce ffuel cconsump-tion.A more “sporty” programme is selectedwhen the accelerator pedal moves fast.The pedal does not have to be depressedto the point of kick-down (see page2.92). In this mode, the gearbox will shiftup later to make full use of the enginepower reserves.

Manual ggearbox Automatic ggearbox*

TO8-028 B8L-009

DRIVING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.89

2.90 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DRIVING


The downward shift occurs at a higherrate of revolutions than in the economyprogrammes.The gear box is self adapting, and contin-uously selects the most suitable gear pro-gramme. At the same time, the driver canalso make the gear box switch to a more“sporty” programme by pressing theaccelerator quickly. Depending on roadspeed, this makes the gearbox shift downearly into a lower gear for quicker acceler-ation (for instance to overtake anothervehicle), without having to press theaccelerator all the way down to the kick-down position. After the gear box hasshifted back up it returns to the originalprogramme, depending on your style ofdriving.The gear box adapts the gear shifts foruphill and downhill gradients. This pre-vents the gearbox from shifting up anddown unnecessarily on uphill gradients.On downhill gradients, the gearbox shiftsdown into a lower gear when the driverpresses the brake pedal. This makes useof the braking effect of the engine withouthaving to change down manually.

NoteDepending on road resistance, for exam-ple when trailer towing or on uphillstretches, a programme is automaticallyselected which provides more power byshifting into a lower gear. This preventsfrequent gear changes.

Selector llever llockIn positions “P” and “N” with the ignitionswitched on the selector lever is locked.To move the selector lever out of thesepositions the brake pedal must bedepressed and the selector lever buttonpushed in. This prevents a gear frombeing engaged inadvertently and thevehicle from unintentionally moving off.A delay circuit prevents the selector leverfrom locking when it is moved quicklypast the “N” position (for instance from“R” to “D”). This enables for example thevehicle to be “rocked” out of a “boggeddown” position. The shift lock only locksthe selector lever if it is left in the “N”position for more than about 1 secondwithout the brake pedal being depressed.At speeds above 5 km/h the selector leverlock is automatically switched-off in posi-tion “N”.

Safety iinterlock ffor iignition kkey.The key can only be withdrawn with theignition switched off and the selectorlever in position “P” (parking lock).When tthe iignition kkey iis rremoved, ttheselector llever iis llocked iin pposition PP.

DRIVING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.91


Selector llever ppositionsIn the combi-instrument there is a displaythat shows the selector lever position cur-rently selected.

WarningNever sshift sselector llever tto pposi-tion ““R” oor ““P” wwhilst tthe vvehicle iisin mmotion. The ggears ccould bbe ddam-aged –– rrisk oof aaccident!

P –– PParking llockThe driving wheels are locked mechani-cally.The parking lock may only be engagedwhen the vehicle is stationary. Beforemoving the lever in or out of the “P” posi-tion the lock button in the selector leverhandle must be pressed. Before movingthe selector lever out of the “P” positionwith the ignition switched on, the brakepedal must also be depressed.

R –– RReverse ggearThe reverse gear should only be engagedwhen the vehicle is stationary and withthe engine idling. Before engaging theposition “R” from the positions “P” or “N”the brake pedal must be depressed andthe lock button in the selector lever han-dle must also be pressed.The reversing lights come on when theselector lever is in the “R” position withthe ignition switched on.

N –– NNeutral ((idling pposition)To move the lever out of neutral when sta-tionary or at speeds below 5 km/h andwith ignition switched on depress thebrake pedal and press the lock button inthe selector lever handle.

D –– NNormal ddriving ppositionThe four forward gears are shifted up anddown automatically depending uponengine load and road speed.Under certain driving conditions it isadvantageous to engage one of the fol-lowing described selector lever positions.

3 –– PPosition ffor ““hilly” rregionsThe 1st, 2nd and 3rd gears are shifted upand down automatically depending uponengine load, road speed and selectedprogramme (E or S). The 4th gear is notengaged. This increases the engine brak-ing effect when the accelerator pedal isreleased.This selector position is recommended insituations where the gearbox alternatesfrequently between 3rd and 4th gears inthe “D” position.

LEO-026

2.92 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DRIVING


2 –– PPosition ffor ssteep hhillsThis selector lever position is suitable forlong climbs and descents.The 1st and 2nd gears are shifted up anddown automatically depending uponengine load and speed. The 3rd and 4thgears are not engaged.

1 –– Position ffor vvery ssteep hhills or mmanoeuvres

This selector lever position is recom-mended for very steep descents.To engage this gear, the lock button in theselector lever handle must be pressed in.The vehicle only moves in 1st gear. The2nd, 3rd and 4th gears are not engaged. The cruise control* cannot be used inposition “1”.

NoteWhen changing down manually the selec-tor lever can be moved into gears 3, 2,and 1, but the gearbox will not changedown until it is no longer possible to over-rev the engine.

Kick-down ddeviceThe kick-down device gives maximumacceleration. When the accelerator pedalis pressed right down past the full throttleposition, depending on road speed andengine speed, the box changes down intoa lower gear. The shift into the next highergear then takes place as soon as the max-imum specified engine speed is reached.

WarningPlease nnote tthat tthe ddriving wwheelscould ggo iinto aa sspin iif tthe kkick-down ddevice iis aapplied oon rroadswith bblack iice.Risk oof sskidding!

Notes oon ddriving

StartingThe engine can only be started whenselector lever is at “N” or “P”. See also“Starting engine”.

Selecting aa ddriving rrangeWhen tthe vvehicle iis sstationary aandthe eengine iis rrunning aalways ddepressthe ffoot bbrake wwhen sselecting aa ggear.When tthe vvehicle iis sstationary ddo nnotdepress tthe aaccelerator wwhen sselect-ing aa ggear.If tthe llever iis mmoved aaccidentally iinto“N” wwhen ddriving, rrelease aacceleratorand llet tthe eengine sspeed ddrop ttoidling bbefore sselecting aa fforward ggearagain.

WarningWhen tthe eengine iis rrunning iit iisnecessary tto hhold tthe vvehicle wwiththe ffoot bbrake iin aall ggears. BBecausewith aan aautomatic ggearbox tthetransfer oof ppower iin nnot ffully iinter-rupted eeven aat iidling sspeed –– aandthe vvehicle ttends tto ““creep”.

DRIVING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.93


When tthe vvehicle iis sstationary aanda ggear iis eengaged, tthe tthrottlemust nnot bbe oopened iinadvertentlyon aany aaccount ((for iinstance bbyhand ffrom tthe eengine ccompart-ment). OOtherwise tthe vvehicle wwillmove iimmediately –– eeven iif tthehand bbrake hhas bbeen ffully aapplied.Before wworking oon tthe vvehicle wwiththe eengine rrunning, aapply tthehandbrake aand pput tthe sselectorlever iin ““P”.

Moving ooffSelect driving range (R, D, 3, 2, 1). Waituntil tthe ggearbox hhas sshifted aand tthepower fflow iis mmade tto tthe ddrivingwheels (light selection jerk perceptible).Then oone ccan aaccelerate.

StoppingWhen the vehicle is stopped for a shortperiod, for example at traffic lights, it isonly necessary to apply the brakes. It isnot necessary to move selector lever to“N”. The engine should however only berunning at idling speed.

Parking

WarningTo pprevent tthe vvehicle ffrom rrollingaway inadvertently, yyou sshouldalways aapply tthe hhandbrake ffirmlywhen tthe vvehicle hhas ccome tto tthecomplete sstop. AAlso pplace tthe ggearselector llever iin pposition ““P”.

On a gradient the handbrake should beapplied firmly first and then the parkinglock engaged. This will ensure that thelocking mechanism is not too heavilyloaded and makes the lock easier to dis-engage.

Tow sstartingVehicles with an automatic gearbox can-not be started by towing or pushing thevehicle. See "Tow start/towing" chapter.When the battery is flat, the engine canbe started from the battery of anothervehicle by using jumper cables. See“Emergency starting”.

TowingIf a vehicle must be towed instructions inthe "Tow start/towing" chapter must befollowed strictly.

Emergency pprogramIn case of an electronic failure of the gear-box, emergency programs are activateddepending on the type of failure.

• The gear box continues to shift auto-matically, but strong jerking is noticeable.Consult a Technical Service Centre.

• The gear box no longer shifts automati-cally.In this case, you can shift manually. Onlythe 3rd gear is available in the positions"D", "3" and "2" of the selector lever.In the positions "1" and "R" of the selec-tor lever, the 1st gear and reverse gear,respectively, are available as customary.It may happen that the gear oil is over-heated when the torque converter has towork harder, especially if 2nd gear ismissing. In such cases, go to a Technical ServiceCentre as soon as possible.

2.94 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DRIVING


DRIVING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––2.95


Handbrake

To apply the handbrake pull lever upfirmly. On hills the 1st gear or with auto-matic gearbox the parking lock shouldalso be engaged. The handbrake shouldalways be applied so firmly that it is notpossible to drive inadvertently with thehandbrake on.When handbrake is applied with the igni-tion on, the brake warning lamp comeson.To release handbrake, pull lever upslightly, press locking knob (arrow) in andpush lever right down.

Warning

• To pprevent tthe vvehicle ffromrolling aaway iinadvertently, yyoushould aalways aapply tthe hhand-brake ffirmly aafter tthe vvehicle hhascome tto aa ccomplete sstop.You sshould aalso pput tthe ccar iintogear ((manual ggearbox) oor tthe ggearselector llever iin pposition ““P”(automatic ggearbox).

• Please nnote tthat tthe hhandbrakemust bbe rreleased ccompletely aafterapplication. IIf tthe hhandbrake iisonly ppartly rreleased iit ccould lleadto ooverheating oof tthe bbrakes aandthus nnegatively aaffect tthe ffunctionof tthe bbrake ssystem. TThis ccouldalso llead tto ppremature rrear bbrakelining wwear.

TO8-029

2.96 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––DRIVING


Ignition llock

Electronic eengine bblockWhen switching ignition on vehicle andkey automatically compare data. This isdisplayed by a pilot light in the dash-board. See “Warning lamps” chapter.If the wrong (i.e. false) key is used, the carwill not start and the immobiliser pilotlight will come on.

Petrol eengines

1 –– Ignition aand eengine sswitched ooff:Steering ccan bbe llocked.

2 –– Ignition oon

3 –– Starting eengine

Diesel eengines

1 –– FFuel ssupply ccut ooff aand eengineswitched ooff:Steering ccan bbe llocked.

2 –– GGlow pplugs // nnormal rrunningposition

To avoid unnecessary strain on the bat-tery, do not use any other major electricalequipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.

3 –– SStarting eengine

For aall vvehicles:

Position 11:To lock the steering wheel withdraw thekey and turn the wheel until you hear thepin engage.In vehicles with automatic gearbox thekey can only be turned to position 1 andwithdrawn when the selector lever is inthe “P” position.

WarningOn vvehicles wwith mmanual ggearbox,never rremove tthe kkey ffrom tthesteering llock wwhile tthe vvehicle iismoving. OOtherwise tthe ssteeringwheel mmay llock uunexpectedly.

Position 22:If the key is difficult to turn in the lock,move the steering wheel until the keyturns freely.

Position 33:Before the starter can be operated a sec-ond time the key must be turned back toposition 1. This prevents the starter motorfrom engaging while the engine is run-ning, as this could damage the starter.

Ignition kkey llock*On vehicles with an automatic gearbox*after switching off the ignition the igni-tion key can only be withdrawn if theselector lever is in the “P” position.When the ignition key has been with-drawn the selector lever is locked in thisposition.

B8D-005

DRIVING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.97


Starting tthe eengine

General nnotes

WarningWhen rrunning tthe eengine iin ccon-fined sspaces tthere iis aa ddanger oofpoisoning.

• Before starting, move gear lever to neu-tral (with automatic gearbox, selectorlever in “P” or “N” position) and applyhandbrake firmly.

• On vehicles with a manual gearboxdepress the clutch pedal when operatingstarter so that starter only has to turnengine.

• As soon as engine starts, release theignition key so that starter can disengage.

• After starting a cold engine it maysound noisy for a moment or two becausethe oil pressure has to build up in thehydraulic tappets first. This is normal andno cause for alarm.

❀Do nnot wwarm tthe eengine uup bbyrunning iit wwhen tthe vvehicle iis ssta-

tionary. BBegin ddriving tthe vvehicle aassoon aas ppossible.

• Do not over-rev or use full throttle untilthe engine has reached the normal oper-ating temperature.

• On vvehicles wwith aa ccatalytic ccon-verter tthe eengine mmust nnot bbe sstartedby ttowing tthe vvehicle iin eexcess oof 50 mm. OOtherwise uunburned ffuel ccanpass iinto tthe cconverter aand llead ttodamage.

• Before ttow sstarting aan eengine, aanattempt sshould bbe mmade aat uusing tthebattery oof aanother vvehicle aas sstartinghelp. SSee ""Starting hhelp" cchapter.

Petrol eenginesThese engines are equipped with a petrolinjection system that automatically sup-plies the correct fuel/air mixture at allambient temperatures.When engine is ccold oor aat ooperatingtemperature do not accelerate before orduring the starting procedure.If the engine does not start at once, stopusing the starter after 10 seconds. Waitabout half a minute and then try again.If the engine does still not start, this maybe due to a blow out of the electric fuelpump fuse. See "Fuses" chapter.When the engine is vvery hhot it may benecessary to accelerate slightly after theengine has started.

2.98 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DRIVING


Diesel eengines

Glow pplug ssystemAfter switching to the driving position(ignition on) the required glow plugwarm-up time is indicated by a lampwhich is controlled by the coolant temper-ature. See “Warning lamps” chapter.

Starting aa ccold eengineAmbient temperature above +5 °C:The engine can be started without pre-glow. Do not depress throttle during thestarting procedure.Ambient temperature below +5 °C:

• Turn the key in the ignition lock to posi-tion 2 the glow plug warning lamp comeson. It goes out when the ignition temper-ature is reached.While tthe gglow pplugs aare wworking ddonot sswitch oon aany hheavy ccurrent ccon-sumers bbecause tthis wwould pplace aanunnecessary lload oon tthe bbattery.If the engine does still not start, this maybe due to a blow out of the preheatingfuse. See "Fuses" chapter.

• When the warning lamp goes out, startthe engine immediately.

Do not depress the accelerator whilestarting.If the engine only fires irregularly, con-tinue to operate the starter a few secondslonger (30 seconds at maximum) until theengine runs under its own power.If the engine does not start, switch theglow plugs on again and try starting itagain as described.

Starting aa wwarm eengineThe glow plug lamp does not come on –the engine can be started straight away.

Starting aafter rrunning oout oof ffuelIf the tank on vehicles with a dieselengine was empty, starting after fillingwith diesel fuel can take longer than nor-mal – up to one minute. This is becausethe fuel system must first be freed of airbefore starting.

DRIVING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.99


Stopping tthe eengine

• Valid ffor aall eengines:When tthe eengine hhas bbeen ssubjectedto aa hheavy eengine lload ffor aa llong tti-me, tthe eengine mmust nnot bbe sswitchedoff aabruptly. LLet iit iidle ffor aabout 2 mminutes tto aavoid ooverheating.

WarningAfter tthe eengine hhas bbeen sstoppedthe ffan ccan ccontinue rrunning ffor aawhile ((up tto aabout 110 mminutes) wwiththe iignition sswitched ooff. IIt ccan aalsostart tto rrun aagain ssuddenly aafter aashort ttime iif

– the ccoolant ttemperature iincreasesdue tto hheat bbuild-up

– when tthe eengine iis hhot aand ttheengine ccompartment iis hheatedadditionally bby sstrong ssunlight.

Special ccare mmust ttherefore bbetaken wwhen wworking iin tthe eenginecompartment.

• Valid ffor aall vversions wwith ccatalyticconverter*:Do nnot sswitch ooff tthe iignition wwhilethe vvehicle iis iin mmotion wwith aa ggearengaged; ootherwise uunburned ffuelmay ggo iinto tthe cconverter, wwhere iitwould bburn aand ccause ooverheating,which wwould ddamage tthe cconverter.

2.100 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DRIVING


To relieve the foot on the acceleratorpedal this system can hold any speedabove around 30 km/h constant, so far asthis is permitted by engine output.

WarningThe ccruise ccontrol ssystem sshouldnot bbe uused iin ddense ttraffic aandpoor rroad cconditions ((slippery ssur-faces, aaquaplaning, ggravel).

When tthe ssystem iis sswitched oon ddonot mmove iinto nneutral wwithout dde-pressing tthe cclutch ppedal, ootherwisethe eengine wwill rrace aand ccan, uundercertain ccircumstances, bbecome ddam-aged.

NoteOn vehicles with an automatic gearbox,the Cruise Control System is only activewhen the gear selector is in position D, 3or 2. If any other position (P, N, R or 1) isselected while driving, the last speed tobe stored is deleted and the system isswitched off.

Switching oonThe system is operated with the slidingswitch A and the press button B on theturn signal/main beam lever.The system is switched oon by movingswitch A to ON.

Storing sspeedWhen the speed to be maintained hasbeen reached the press button B (SET)must be pressed briefly. The foot can thenbe taken off the accelerator pedal.The speed can also be increased in thenormal way with the accelerator pedal.When the pedal is then released the pre-viously programmed speed is resumed.This however, is not the case when thestored speed is exceeded by more than 10 km/h for a period of more than 5 min-utes. The speed must then be storedagain.

WarningThe pprogrammed sspeed mmust oonlybe rresumed wwhen iit iis nnot ttoo hhighfor tthe eexisting ttraffic cconditions!

Cruise ccontrol ssystem*

B8L-068

DRIVING ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2.101


Altering sstored sspeed

Reducing/settingThe stored speed can be reduced bypressing button B. By pressing button B briefly, the storedspeed is reduced by a preset amount. Ifyou press and hold the button, the speedwill decrease through automatic decelera-tion. The speed reached when releasingthe button will be stored.If the button is released at a speed of lessthan approx. 30 km/h, the memory isdeleted. The speed must then, if neces-sary, be reset using button B after thevehicle has accelerated to a speed higherthan approx. 30 km/h.

Accelerating/storingThe stored speed can be increased with-out depressing the accelerator by movingthe slide control A to RES.By briefly pressing the slide control, thespeed is increased by a preset amount. Ifthe switch is moved to the left and held,the speed is increased through automaticacceleration. The speed reached when theswitch is released is then saved.

Switching ssystem ooff temporarily

Vehicles wwith mmanual ggearbox:The system is temporarily sswitched ooffwhen the brake or clutch pedals are usedor when the switch A is moved to OFF (notengaged).The speed stored at this time will remainin the memory.To resume the previously stored speedpush switch A fully to the left after thebrake or clutch pedals are released.

WarningThe pprogrammed sspeed mmust oonlybe rresumed wwhen iit iis nnot ttoo hhighfor eexisting ttraffic cconditions.

2.102 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DRIVING


Vehicles wwith aautomatic ggear bbox:The system is temporarily sswitched ooffwhen the brake or clutch pedals are usedor when the switch A is moved to OFF (notengaged).The speed stored at this time will remainin the memory.To resume the previously stored speedpush switch A fully to the left after thebrake or clutch pedals are released.

WarningThe pprogrammed sspeed mmust oonlybe rresumed iif iit ccomplies wwith tthespeed rregulations oof tthat mmoment.

Furthermore, the system will be switchedoff ttemporarily if the selector lever ismoved to positions N or 1.The speed stored in the memory at thistime will bbe ddeleted.

Storing sspeedIf no speed was saved before the systemwas temporarily switched off or if thestored speed was deleted, a new speedcan be stored in the following manner:

• Move switch A fully to the left and holduntil the desired speed has been reached.The speed is stored when the switch isreleased.

or

• Press button B briefly. The currentspeed is stored

Switching tthe ssystem ooff completely

Vehicles wwith aa mmanual ggear bbox:The system is completely sswitched ooffwhen switch A is moved entirely to theright (OFF engaged) or when the vehicle isstopped and the ignition is switched off.

Vehicles wwith aautomatic ggear bbox:The system is completely sswitched ooffby selecting one of the following posi-tions by moving the selector lever:

• to positions P, N, R or 1.

orby switching the ignition off when thevehicle is stationary.

B8L-068

FILLING THE TANK

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5

INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7

Wheelspin control (TCS)* . . . . . . 3.10

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12

Power steering* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13

YOUR VEHICLE AND THEENVIRONMENT

The first 1,500 km – and afterwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14

Cleaning the exhaust fumes . . . . 3.15

Environment-friendly and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23

Headlight covering . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

Care of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27

CHECKING AND REFILLING

Engine bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . 3.35

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37

Cooling system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41

Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44

Battery.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45

Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . 3.50

SERVICING AND REPLACING

Accessories, modifications andreplacement of parts . . . . . . . . . 3.51

Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52

Dust and pollen filter* . . . . . . . . 3.53

IF AND WHEN

First aid kit, warning triangle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55

On board tools, spare wheel . . . 3.56

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59

Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.65

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.71

Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74

Installing a radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.83

Mobile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.84

Emergency starting. . . . . . . . . . . 3.85

Tow start/towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.87

Lifting the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . 3.91

INDEX

TIPS AND MAINTENANCE ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––3.1

Unlocking tthe ttank fflapTo unlock the tank flap press the button.The unlock function only functions if theignition is switched off.

The filler neck is in the rear right-sidepanel. You can reach the lockable cap after hav-ing opened the tank flap (see illustration).The tank holds about 55 liters.

❀As ssoon aas tthe ccorrectly ooperatedautomatic nnozzle sswitches ooff ffor

the ffirst ttime, tthe ttank iis ffull. DDo nnotthen ttry tto pput mmore ffuel iin bbecausethe eexpansion sspace iin tthe ttank wwillbe ffilled –– tthe ffuel ccan tthen ooverflowwhen iit bbecomes wwarm.After filling the tank, screw cap and closetank flap until it engages. The cap is tiedto an anti-loss cord.

3.2 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– FILLING THE TANK

TIPS AND MAINTENANCE

Filling tthe ttank

TO8-016 CON-009

NotesAny fuel spillage should be wiped off thepaint finish immediately, as the paintcould otherwise be damaged, especially ifit is RME (“biodiesel”) fuel.On vvehicles wwith aa ccatalytic cconverter,never ddrive uuntil tthe ffuel ttank iis ccom-pletely eempty. TThe iirregular ffuel ssup-ply ccan ccause mmisfiring. TThis aallowsunburnt ffuel iinto tthe eexhaust ssystem,which ccan ccause ooverheating aanddamage tto tthe ccatalyst.

FILLING THE TANK –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.3


In the chapter “Technical Data” and onthe inside of the tank flap you will findinformation on the correct octane ratingfor your engine.

General nnotes

• Unleaded petrol must comply with DIN EN1) 228 and leaded petrol with DIN 51 600.

• If, in an emergency, the octane rating ofthe available petrol is lower than thatrequired by the engine, only drive withmedium engine speeds and low engineloading. High eengine lloading wwith ffullthrottle oor hhigh rrevs ccan ccause eenginedamage. Fill tank with petrol of the cor-rect octane rating as soon as possible.

• Fuel with a higher octane rating thanthat required by the engine can be usedwithout limitation. There are, however, noadvantages regarding output and con-sumption.

❀Even oone ttankful oof lleaded ppetrolwill ddetract ffrom tthe eefficiency oof

the ccatalytic cconverter.

See cchapter ““Filling tthe ttank”.

1) European Standard.

Petrol aadditivesThe quality of the fuel has a decisive influ-ence upon the running behavior, perfor-mance and service life of the engine. Theadditives which are mixed into the petrolare of particular significance. It is there-fore advisable only to use good qualitypetrol ccontaining aadditives.

3.4 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– FILLING THE TANK


Petrol

Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN1) 590.CZ2) no llower tthan 449.

RME ffuel ((“diester”)According to norm DIN 51 6063).Vehicles with diesel engines can also runon RME ffuel (Rapeseed Methyl Ester).Ask a Technical Service Centre or automo-bile club where biodiesel is available.See chapter "Filling the tank".

Properties oof RRME

• RME is chemically produced from veg-etable oil (predominantly rapeseed oil) ina process whereby the oil is mixed withmethanol and converted, via a catalyst,into RME.

• RME is almost totally sulfur free. Thecombustion of RME thus emits practicallyno sulfur dioxide (SO2).

1) European Standard.2) Cetan-Zahl (Cetane Number). Measure of

diesel fuel ignitability.3) DIN preliminary Standard.

• Exhaust gas contains less– carbon monoxide– hydrocarbons– particles (i.e. soot)than with conventional diesel fuel.All emission values are lower than legalrequirements.

• RME fuel is biodegradable.

• Performance may be slightly lower.

• Fuel consumption may be slightlyhigher.

• RME can be used in temperatures downto approximately –10 °C.

• Diesel must be added at ambient tem-peratures of less than –10 °C to preventdeterioration of the biodiesel due to lowtemperatures. The mixing ratio of dieselto biodiesel must be approximately50:50.If tthe RRME rratio eexceeds 550%, ttoomuch ssmoke mmay bbe fformed.

• During the summer months, RME maybe mixed with diesel at any ratio.

FILLING THE TANK –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.5


Diesel

Driving iin wwinterWhen using summer Diesel trouble maybe experienced at temperatures below 0 °C because the fuel thickens due to waxseparation.For this reason winter Diesel which ismore resistant to cold is sold during thewinter in some countries, and this workscorrectly down to between –15 °C and–22 °C approximately, depending on thebrand of fuel used.The biodiesel available in countries withdifferent climactic conditions usually hasdifferent temperature characteristics.Technical Service Centres or service sta-tions in each country can inform you ofthe specific characteristics of the respec-tive diesel.

Filter ppreheatingThe vehicle is fitted with a filter preheater.This will ensure that the fuel system willremain operational down to about –25 °C,provided that winter Diesel which is coldresistant down to –15 °C is used.If, at temperatures below –25 °C the fuelis waxed to such an extent that the enginewill not start it is sufficient to place thevehicle in a warm enclosure for a while.Fuel additives (anti-waxing agent), petroland similar fluids must not be mixed withDiesel fuel.

3.6 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– FILLING THE TANK


General nnotes

• Brake lining wear depends to a largeextent on the operating conditions andstyle of driving. On vehicles which areused mainly in town traffic and stop/startconditions or are driven hard it may benecessary to have the thickness of thebrake linings checked by a TechnicalService Centre in between the intervalsgiven in the Inspection and ServiceSchedule.

• Change down in good time when dri-ving downhill, in order to make use of theengine braking effect. This relieves strainon the brake system. When the brakes areapplied do not keep them on continu-ously, apply and release alternately.

What ccan hhave aa nnegative eeffect oonthe bbrakes?

Wet oor ggritted rroad ssurface

Warning

• Under ccertain cconditions ee.g.after ddriving tthrough wwater, hheavyrain ffalls oor aafter tthe vvehicle hhasbeen wwashed, tthe bbrakes ccouldset iin llater tthan nnormal ddue ttodamp, oor iin wwinter –– ffrozen, bbrakediscs aand llinings –– tthe bbrakesmust ffirst bbe ddried tthrough ccarefulbraking.

• Full bbraking ppower mmight aalsoset iin llater tthan nnormal eeven wwhendriving oon ggritted rroads iif yyouhave nnot bbraked ffor ssome ttime ––the llayer oof ssalt oon tthe bbrake ddisksand bbrake llinings mmust ffirst bbeworn ddown wwhilst bbraking.

INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.7


Brakes

Overheating oof tthe bbrakes

Warning

• Never llet tthe bbrakes ““rub” bbypressing tthe ppedal ttoo llightlywhen yyou ddo nnot rreally nneed ttobrake. TThis ccauses tthe bbrakes ttooverheat, lleads tto llonger bbrakingdistances aand tto aa hhigher llevel oofwear.

• Before sstarting oon aa llong sstretchof rroad iin aa vvery hhilly aarea, ppleasereduce yyour sspeed, cchange tto aalower ggear ((manual ggearbox) oorchoose aa llower pposition ((auto-matic ggearbox). IIn tthis wway yyouwill uuse tthe bbraking ppower oof ttheengine aand rrelieve ppressure oon tthebrakes.

• If aa ffront sspoiler, ffull ssize wwheeltrims eetc., iis rretrofitted, iit iisnecessary tto eensure tthat tthe fflowof aair tto tthe ffront bbrakes iis nnotrestricted –– ootherwise tthe bbrakescan ooverheat.

Servobrake

WarningThe sservo iis ooperated bby aa vvacuumwhich iis oonly ggenerated wwhen ttheengine iis rrunning. FFor tthis rreasonthe vvehicle sshould nnot bbe aallowedto rroll wwith tthe eengine sswitchedoff.When tthe bbrake sservo iis nnot wwork-ing bbecause, ffor eexample, tthevehicle iis bbeing ttowed oor aa ddefecthas ooccurred oon tthe bbrake sservoitself, tthe bbrake ppedal mmust bbepressed cconsiderably hharder ttocompensate ffor tthe aabsence oofservo aassistance.

Anti-locking bbrake ssystem*The ABS plays a major part in increasingthe active safety of the vehicle. The bigadvantage when compared with a conven-tional brake system is that even whenbraking hard on a slippery road surfacethe best possible steerability is retainedfor the road condition because the wheelsdo not lock. Steering ccontrol iis tthere-fore mmaintained, ggiving tthe bbest ddri-ving sstability ppossible.However, one must not expect the ABSsystem to shorten the braking distanceunder all conditions. When driving ongravel or on fresh snow covering a slip-pery surface, i.e. when one should be dri-ving very slowly and carefully, the stop-ping distance may even be slightly longer.

Please aalso rrefer tto tthe nnotes oon tthenext ppage.

3.8 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY


How tthe AABS* ssystem wworksAn automatic check is made when aspeed of approx. 6 km/h is reached.When this happens a pumping noise canbe heard.When the turning speed of a wheelreaches a level which is too low for thevehicle speed and it tends to lock, thebrake pressure to this wheel is reduced.On the front axle the brake pressure isregulated for each wheel individually,whereas on the rear axle, the pressure isregulated for both wheels at the sametime. As a result the braking effect is thesame for both rear wheels and the drivingstability is retained as far as possible.This rregulating pprocess mmakes iitselfknown bby mmovement oof tthe bbrakepedal aand iis aaccompanied bby nnoises.This is done deliberately as a warning tothe driver that a wheel or the wheels arein the locking range. So tthat tthe AABScan rregulate eeffectively iin tthis rrangethe bbrake ppedal mmust rremaindepressed –– oon nno aaccount sshould iitbe ppumped!

WarningHowever tthe AABS ssystem ccannotovercome tthe pphysical llimits. TThismust bbe bborne iin mmind pparticularlyon sslippery oor wwet rroads. WWhen ttheABS ccomes iinto tthe ccontrol rrangethe sspeed mmust iimmediately bbeadapted tto tthe rroad aand ttrafficconditions. TThe iincreased aamountof ssafety aavailable mmust nnot ttemptone iinto ttaking rrisks.

If a defect occurs on the ABS it is indi-cated by one or two warning lamps.

INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.9


3.10 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY


In vehicles with front wheel traction, theTCS lowers the engine power to stop thewheel from spinning when you accelerate.This feature works at any speed in combi-nation with the ABS. If there is an ABSbreakdown, the TCS stops working.Vehicles fitted with TCS* are also fittedwith an electronic differential lock (EDL).The EDL makes it much easier, or evenpossible, to pull away, accelerate andclimb steep gradiants in unfavourableconditions.The EDL works fully automatically – thedriver does not need to do anything at all. It uses the ABS sensors to monitor thespeed of the driving wheels. Up to a speedof about 80 km/h (50 mph), a difference inspeed of the drive wheels of approxi-mately 100 rpm caused by a slippery roadsurface on one sside is balanced out byslowing down the wheel which is slippingand thereby applying more driving forceto the other drive wheel through the dif-ferential.This ccontrol pprocedure ccan bbe ddetectedby tthe ssound iit mmakes.In oorder tto oobtain tthe bbest ppossibleperformance ffrom tthe EEDL, aalwaysuse tthe cclutch aand aaccelerator ppedalsaccording tto tthe rroad cconditionswhen bbeginning tto ddrive.

WarningWhen aaccelerating oon aa sslipperyroad ssurface, ee.g. oon iice oor ssnow,use tthe aaccelerator ppedal ccare-fully. TThe wwheels ccan sspin, eevenwith EEDL, aand tthus iimpair ddrivingstability.

To ensure that the brake disc of thebraked wheel does not overheat, the EDLwill automatically switch itself off if exces-sive demands are placed on it. The vehi-cle remains operational and has the samecharacteristics as a vehicle without EDL.For this reason, the switching off of theEDL is not noticed.As soon as the brakes have cooled off, theEDL will switch itself back on again.If the ABS warning lamp lights up theremay be a fault present in the EDL. Take thevehicle to a Technical Service Centre assoon as possible!

WarningThe sstyle oof ddriving mmust aalwaysbe aadapted tto ssuit tthe rroad ssur-face aand ttraffic cconditions. TTheincreased ssafety ooffered bby ttheEDL sshould nnot eencourage oone ttotake uunnecessary rrisks.

Wheelspin ccontrol ((TCS)*

INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.11


The TCS connects automatically once theengine is started. If necessary, it can beconnected or disconnected by brieflypressing the button located on the centralconsole next to the hand brake.When the TCS is switched off a pilot lightcomes on. You should normally always have the TCSon. Only in exceptional circumstanceswhen you want the wheels to spin shouldyou switch it off. For instance:– With small emergency wheel,– When you are using snow chains.– When driving in deep snow or on a soft

surface.– When the car is stuck, to “rock” it out,

and– To go up slopes where each traction

wheel is on a surface with a very differ-ent grip (I.e. ice on the left, dry asphalton the right). The EDS continues to func-tion under these conditions.

Afterwards you should always reconnectthis device.

WarningDriving sstyle sshould aalways bbemodified tto ssuit tthe ttraffic aandroad cconditions. TThe ggreater ssa-fety pprovided bby tthe TTCS sshouldnot llead yyou tto ttake ggreater rrisks.

NoteFor the TCS to work properly all fourwheels should be the same. Otherwiseengine performance may be reduced.See also “Changing wheels”.

3.12 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY

The ESP increases the control over thevehicle in situations such as acceleratingor in turns.The ESP expands the functions of theABS/TCS and decreases under any cir-cumstance the risk of skidding. This con-tributes to an improved stability of thevehicle.The system works in the total realm ofspeed in relation to the ABS. In case offailure in the ABS, the ESP will also fail.The ESP connects automatically when theengine is switched on and checks itself.The ESP warning light lights up whenthe system is disconnected. See the"Switches" chapter.The ESP pilot light lights up when the sys-tem is disconnected. See “Warninglights” chapter.The ESP should always be connected.Only in exceptional cases, when the skid-ding effect is desired under extremelysporty conditions, the system can be dis-connected.Afterwards the system should be recon-nected.The ABS and the EDS remain connectedeven if the ESP is disconnected.

FunctioningThe electronic stability program encom-passes the ABS, EDS and TCS. In additionto all available data for these functions,the ESP control unit needs additionalmeasurements supplied by high precisionsensors. The measuring data consists ofthe speed at which the vehicle turnsaround its vertical axis, acceleration,pressure on brakes and the turn of thesteering wheel.With the help of the steering wheel sensorand the vehicle’s speed, the desireddirection is determined and constantlycompared to the vehicle’s real behavior.When differences occur, such as incipientskidding, the ESP automatically brakesthe adequate wheel.The vehicle stabilizes through the brakingforce on the wheel. If the vehicle swingsout (tendency of the tail to swing out) thebrakes will act on the exterior front wheel.In case the swerve is insufficient (ten-dency to leave the curve) the brakingforce will be exerted on the interior rearwheel. The braking generates a noise.

WarningThe EESP ccannot oovercome pphysicallimits. TThis mmust bbe bborne iin mmindparticularly oon wwet oor iicy rroads.The ddriving sstyle mmust aalways bbeadapted tto tthe rroad aand ttrafficconditions. TThe iincreased ssafetyoffered bby tthe EESP sshould nnotencourage oone tto ttake uunneces-sary rrisks.


Electronic SStability PProgram ((ESP)*

INTELLIGENT TECHNOLOGY –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.13


Do not keep the steering wheel fullyturned more than 15 seconds when theengine is switched on, as the hydraulic oilwill be heated to a high temperature bythe servo pump.This ccould ddamage tthe ppower ssteer-ing ssystem.Furthermore every time you turn the steer-ing wheel as far as it will go with theengine off, you will hear a series of noisesmade by the excessive effort of the servopump. The engine tick over may also bereduced for a short time.

Power ssteering*

3.14 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT


Running-inDuring the first few operating hours theengine internal friction is higher thanlater on when all the moving parts havebedded down. How well this running-inprocess is done depends to a consider-able extent on the way the vehicle is dri-ven during the first 1500 km.

Up tto 11000 kkilometresthe following general rules apply:

• Do nnot uuse ffull tthrottle

• Do nnot ddrive ffaster tthan 33/4 oof ttopspeed

• Avoid hhigh eengine sspeeds

• Trailer towing should if possible beavoided.

Warning

• New ttyres mmust aalso bbe ““run iin”because tthey ddo nnot hhave mmaximumadhesion aat tthe sstart. TThis mmust bbetaken iinto aaccount bby ddriving ccare-fully dduring tthe ffirst 1100 kkm.

• New bbrake llinings mmust aalso bberun iin aand ddo nnot hhave tthe oopti-mum ffriction pproperties dduring tthefirst 2200 kkm. TThe sslightly rreducedbraking eeffect ccan bbe ccompen-sated ffor bby mmore ppressure oon tthebrake ppedal. TThis aalso aapplieswhen nnew llinings hhave bbeen ffitted.

From 11000 –– 11500 kkmThe speed can be gradually increased tothe road or engine maximum.

During aand aafter tthe rrunning-inperiod tthe ffollowing aapplies:

• Do not overrev the engine when cold –either in neutral or in the gears.All speeds and revs given are only validwhen engine is properly wwarm.

❀Do nnot ddrive wwith uunnecessarilyhigh eengine rrevs. CChanging uup

one ggear hhelps tto ssave ffuel, ddecreasenoise aand ppollution. SSee aalso tthe"Driving eeconomically aand eecologi-cally" cchapter.

• Do not let engine labour – change downwhen engine no longer runs smoothly.

After tthe rrunning-in pperiod

• On vehicles with a rev counter* themaximum permissible engine speed isshown by the beginning of the red zoneon the rev counter scale. The needle of thecounter must not move into this zone.Extremely high engine revs will be auto-matically governed.

The ffirst 11,500 kkm – aand aafterwards

YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.15


The pperfect ffunctioning oof tthe cclean-ing ssystem ffor eexhaust ffumes is ofgreat importance for the environment-friendly functioning of your vehicle.Therefore, keep in mind the followingpoints:

• Versions with a catalytic converter mustonly use unleaded fuel. See "Filling thetank".

• In vehicles with a catalytic converternever drive until the fuel tank is com-pletely empty. Irregular fuel supply cancause misfiring, thus allowing unburnedfuel into the exhaust system which cancause overheating and damage to the cat-alyst.

• If while driving you experience startingdifficulties, loss of power or engine prob-lems the cause could be a failure in theignition. In this case, fuel may haveentered the exhaust system without burn-ing and may be released to the atmos-phere. In addition, the catalyst can deteri-orate due to overheating. Speed needs tobe decreased immediately. See the near-est Technical Service Centre to fix the fail-ure.

• Do not fill the engine with too much oil.See "Checking oil level".

• Do not tow vehicles for more than 50 mwhen trying to tow start. See "Towstat/starting" chapter.

Warning

• Due tto ppossible hhigh ttempera-tures oof tthe ccatalyst, ddo nnot ppark iinplaces wwhere tthe ccatalyst iis eeasilyexposed tto iinflammable mmaterial.

• Do nnot uuse aadditional pprotectionfor tthe bbody oor aanticorrosive pprod-ucts ffor ssumps aand eexhaust ppipes,catalytic cconverters oor hheat sshields.The aabove mmentioned mmaterialcould iignite wwhile ddriving.

NoteEven when the filtering system forexhaust fumes is in perfect working order,under certain circumstances, the fumesmay smell like sulphur. This depends on the percentage of sulfurin the fuel.Often it is sufficient to change brands orbuy super unleaded.

Cleaning tthe eexhaust ffumes



Three factors determine the fuel con-sumption, the burden on the environmentand the wear on the engine, brakes andtyres:

• The personal driving style.

• The individual conditions of the use ofthe car.

• Technical prerequisites.The fuel consumption can be reduced by10 to 15 percent by adopting a thoughtfuland economic driving style. This chapterwill help you lower pollution and savemoney by following 10 suggestions.

Suggestion 11

❀Thoughtful ddriving sstyle

The highest fuel consumption takes placeduring acceleration. If you drive in athoughtful manner you will have to brakeless and, therefore, accelerate less. Youcan also let the vehicle roll, i.e. when youcan foresee that the following traffic lightwill be red.

Suggestion 22

❀Changing ggears ssaves eenergy

Another way to save fuel is to change upas quickly as possible. If you drive withhigh engine revs the car will use up moreenergy.The illustration shows the relationbetween the consumption (l/100 km) andspeed (km/h) in first, second, third,fourth and fifth gear.The following rules may be helpful. Neverdrive more than a few meters in first gear.When you reach 2,000 revolutions, youshould change up.If you drive a vehicle with an automaticgearbox, press the accelerator pedal gen-tly. Do not press it to the kick-down posi-tion. This way, a consumption orientedprogram is automatically selected. Itchanges up as soon as possible and takeslonger to change down.

Environment-friendly aand eeconomical ddriving

B45-354P



Suggestion 33

❀Avoid ddriving aat mmaximum sspeed

Try not to drive at maximum speed. Theincrease of fuel consumption, exhaustpollution and noise is disproportionate athigh speeds.The illustration shows the relationbetween consumption (l/100 km) andspeed (km/h).If only about 3 quarters of top speed isutilized, the fuel consumption will bereduced by about half.

WarningDriving aat hhigh sspeeds ddecreasesroad ssafety.

Suggestion 44

❀Decrease iidling

It is worth switching off1) the engine intraffic jams, at railroad crossings and attraffic lights with a long red light. The sav-ings in fuel after 30-40 seconds with theengine switched off is higher than the fuelused to switch the engine on again.

Suggestion 55

❀Periodic rrevisions

Your fuel savings are guaranteed evenbefore going on a trip with the periodicrevisions by your Technical Service Centre.The maintenance of the engine is not onlya safety and maintenance issue but also afuel consumption issue.Poor fine tuning of the engine mayincrease fuel consumption by up to 10%.Check the oil level every time you fill up.The oil consumption depends largely onthe engine load. Depending on the dri-ving style, the oil consumption can be upto 1.0 l/1000 km.Another suggestion: You can also loweroil consumption by using synthetic oils.

1) Statutory regulations must be respected.

B45-355P



Suggestion 66

❀Avoid sshort ddrives

The engine and the catalytic convertermust reach its optimum functioning tem-perature in order to effectively reduceconsumption and toxic gas emissions.The fuel consumption of a cold engine ofa normal vehicle right after the start isabout 30-40 liters per 100 km. Afterabout one kilometer the consumptiondecreases to 20 liters. After about fourkilometers the engine has warmed up andthe consumption is normal. For this rea-son, it is important to avoid short drivesand heating the vehicle’s engine whenthe vehicle is not moving. Drive onquickly!The ambient temperature also counts. Theillustration shows the difference in con-sumption (l/100km) for the same dis-tance (km) at +20°C and –10°C. Your vehi-cle’s consumption is higher in thesummer than in the winter.

Suggestion 77

❀Check tthe ttyre ppressure

Make sure that the tyres have always ade-quate pressure. Even half a bar lessincreases the level of fuel consumption by5 percent. If the pressure is not correct,the tyres wear out faster due to an exces-sive deformation and overheating which,in turn, will decrease the driving perfor-mance.Always check the tyre pressure when thetyre is cold.In addition, do not drive year round withwinter tyres. They make more noise andincrease fuel consumption by 10 percent.Change to summer tyres on time.

Suggestion 88

❀Avoid uunnecessary wweight

Apart from driving habits and periodicrevisions of your vehicle, there are otherways to reduce fuel consumption:

Avoid uunnecessary wweightEvery kilogram increases fuel consump-tion. For this reason, it is worth checkingyour boot to avoid unnecessary weight.Frequently, the roof rack will stay on theroof even though it is no longer needed.Due to greater air resistance, an unloadedroof rack at a speed of 100-120 km/hincreases the consumption by approx.12%.

B45-356P



Suggestion 99

❀Save eelectricity

The alternator generates electricity whiledriving. The more electricity is used, thehigher the fuel consumption.The heated rear window, extra lights, theheater fan and air conditioning* use alarge amount of energy. The heated rearwindow creates a consumption of approx.one liter for every 10 hours.For this reason, disconnect electrical con-sumers as soon as they are no longerneeded. The alternator generates electric-ity when the engine is running.

Suggestion 110

❀Written ccheck-up

If you wish to reduce fuel consumptionkeep a trip book. It is not much work andis worth while since it allows you to detectpossible consumption variations (positiveor negative) on time and intervene, if nec-essary. If you detect an increase in con-sumption you should examine the drivingconditions since the last filling.



The vehicle is intended mainly for thetransportation of persons and luggagebut it can, with the appropriate technicalequipment, also be used to tow a trailer,if it is fitted with the appropriate technicalequipment and the maximum payloadsare not exceeded (see chapter “TechnicalData”).Towing a trailer not only demands morefrom the car, but from the driver too.You should therefore strictly adhere to theservice and running-in instructions on thefollowing pages.

Technical rrequirements

• The vehicle is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket and all that is tech-nically and legally necessary for trailertowing.

A = Attachment pointsB = 65 mmC = 420 mm (empty vehicle) /

350 mm (vehicle with max. load)D = 300 mmE = 512 mmF = 1118 mmG = 1014 mmAll measurements are expressed in mm.

Trailer ttowing

TO8-030



Operations iinstructions

• The removable ball coupling of the tow-ing bracket* may be stored in the tool boxlocated inside the spare wheel recess.

• Additional mirrors are required if thetraffic behind the trailer is not visible withthe exterior mirrors fitted as standard.Both exterior mirrors must be attached tobrackets in such a way that a sufficientfield of vision to the rear is guaranteed atall times.

• The permitted trailer weight must notbe exceeded under any circumstances.See chapter “Technical Data”.

• When using a trailer on mountainroutes you must bear in mind that the towloads given in the “Technical data” chap-ter are only applicable for slopes of 10%to 12%. If you do not use the full tow loadyou may drive up steeper slopes.

• The given trailer weights are only applic-able for altitudes up to 1000 m above sealevel. As the engine output drops due tothe decreasing air density, the climbingability must also be reduced by 10% foreach further 1000 m.

• Where possible make full use of themaximum permissible drawbar weight onthe ball of the towing bracket but do notexceed it. See chapter “Technical Data”.

• While observing the permissible trailerand drawbar weight, distribute the load inthe trailer so that heavy objects are asnear as possible to the axle. The objectsmust also be secured so that they cannotslip about.

3.22 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT


• The tyre pressures on the towing vehi-cle must be adjusted for full load condi-tions, and also check the pressures on thetrailer.

• The headlight settings, should bechecked with trailer attached before mov-ing off and adjusted as necessary.On vehicles with headlight beam control itis only necessary to turn the knurled discon the dash board in the appropriatedirection.

Driving ttipsTo obtain the best possible handling ofvehicle and trailer, the following shouldbe noted:

• Try to avoid driving with an unladenvehicle and a loaded trailer. If this cannotbe avoided, only drive slowly to allow forthe unfavourable weight distribution.

• As driving stability of vehicle and trailerdecreases when the speed increases donot drive at the maximum permissible topspeed in unfavourable road, weather orwind conditions – particularly when goingdownhill.In any case the speed must be reduced assoon as the trailer shows the slightestsign of snaking. On no account try to stopthe snaking by accelerating.

• For ssafety rreasons oone sshould nnotdrive ffaster tthan 880 kkm/h ((50 mmph).This aalso aapplies iin ccountries wwherehigher sspeeds aare ppermitted.

• Always brake in good time. If the trailerhas an overrun brake, apply the brakesgently at first then firmly. This will avoidthe jerking caused by the trailer wheelslocking. Change down before going down a steephill so that the engine can act as a brake.

• When a long climb in a low gear withextremely high engine revs must be nego-tiated at exceptionally high ambient tem-peratures the coolant temperature gaugemust be observed. When the gauge nee-dle moves to the right end of the scale,the road speed must be reduced immedi-ately.

• The cooling effect of the radiator fancannot be increased by changing down,because the speed of the fan is notdependent on the engine speed. Oneshould therefore not change down evenwhen towing a trailer as long as theengine can cope without the vehiclespeed dropping too much.

YOUR VEHICLE AND THE ENVIRONMENT ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––3.23


General nnotes

• During tthe rrunning iin pperiod yyoushould aavoid ttowing aa ttrailer iif ppossi-ble.

• It iis aadvisable tto hhave tthe vvehicleserviced bbetween tthe IInspectionintervals iif iit iis uused ffrequently ffortowing aa ttrailer.

• The trailer and drawbar load figures onthe data plate of the towing bracket arefor test certification only. The correct fig-ures for the vehicle, which may be lowerthan the above figures, are given in thevehicle documents and in this manual.

• When using the towing device the car’sempty weight is reduced, and as a resultits effective load is decreased.

• Observe all statutory requirementsregarding the use of a trailer.

If the vehicle is to be taken abroad, thefollowing must also be borne in mind:

• If the vehicle has a petrol engine andcatalytic converter, one must ensure thatunleaded petrol will be available duringthe journey – see page 3.4. The automo-bile clubs offer information about theunleaded filling station network.

• In some countries it is possible that avehicle model is sold under conditionswhere some spare parts are not availableor that the Technical Services may onlycarry out limited repairs.SEAT importers and distributors willgladly provide information about the tech-nical preparation of your vehicle in addi-tion to necessary maintenance and repairpossibilities.The addresses are given in the SEATInternational Assistance Guide whichcomes with the car documentation.

Driving aabroad



When the vehicle is used in a countrywhich drives on the opposite side of theroad to the home country, the asymmetricdipped headlights will dazzle oncomingtraffic.To prevent this, the areas of the headlightlenses shown in the illustration must becovered up with an opaque adhesivestrip.When using a sharp object (for example arazor blade) to cut the tape, do not do thisdirectly on the headlights as you mayscratch them.

WarningWhen yyou ddrive oon tthe ooppositeside oof tthe rroad tto yyour oown ccoun-try, aand wwith yyour hheadlightsmasked, bbear iin mmind tthat vvisibil-ity iis rreduced, aand yyou wwill hhave ttoadapt yyour ddriving aand sspeedaccordingly ffor ssafety rreasons.

Headlight ccovering



On tthe rright hheadlamp, iif yyou cchangefrom ddriving oon tthe rright hhand sside ttodriving oon tthe lleft hhand sside oof ttheroad.

On tthe lleft hheadlamp, iif yyou cchangefrom ddriving oon tthe rright hhand sside ttodriving oon tthe lleft hhand sside oof ttheroad.

TO8-032TO8-031



On tthe rright hheadlamp, iif yyou cchangefrom ddriving oon tthe lleft hhand sside ttodriving oon tthe rright hhand sside oof ttheroad.

On tthe lleft hheadlamp, iif yyou cchangefrom ddriving oon tthe lleft hhand sside ttodriving oon tthe rright hhand sside oof ttheroad.

TO8-034TO8-033

CARE AND MAINTENANCE ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.27


Regular aand eexpert ccare hhelps ttomaintain tthe vvalue oof tthe vvehicle.

Warning

• If mmisused, ccar ccare mmaterialscan bbe hharmful tto hhealth.

• Car ccare mmaterials mmust aalwaysbe sstored iin aa ssafe pplace wwherethey aare oout oof rreach oof cchildren.

❀When bbuying ccar ccare mmaterialsone sshould sselect pproducts wwhich

do nnot ddamage tthe eenvironment.Empty ccontainers wwhich tthese mmateri-als wwere iin ddo nnot bbelong wwith hhouse-hold wwaste.

Washing

WarningDampness aand iice iin tthe bbrakesystem ccan hhave aa nnegative eeffecton tthe bbraking ppower.

The best protection against environmen-tal influences is frequent washing anduse of the right waxing product.

How often this treatment is requireddepends, amongst other things on howmuch the vehicle is used, how it is parked(garage, in open under trees etc.), theseasons, weather conditions and environ-mental influences.The llonger bbird ddroppings, iinsects,tree rresin, rroad aand iindustrial ggrime,tar sspots, ssoot, rroad ssalt aand ootheraggressive mmaterials rremain oon tthevehicle ppaint tthe mmore llasting ttheirdestructive eeffect wwill bbe. HHigh ttem-peratures ee.g. ffrom sstrong ssunlightintensifies tthe ccorrosive eeffect.In certain circumstances weekly washingcan be necessary, in other conditionsmonthly washing with appropriate waxingmay be fully adequate.After the period when salt is put on theroads the underside of the vehicle shouldalways be washed thoroughly.

Automatic ccar wwashesThe vehicle paint is so durable that thevehicle can normally be washed withoutproblems in an automatic car wash.However the influence on the Paintdepends on the design of the car wash,the filtering of the wash water, the type ofwash and care material, etc.

Care oof tthe vvehicle

3.28 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CARE AND MAINTENANCE


Notes

• Before going through the car wash,apart from the usual precautions (closingwindows and sliding roof).You do not need to remove the Originalroof aerial.

• If tthere aare sspecial ffittings oon tthe vvehi-cle –– ee.g. sspoilers, rroof rrack, ttwo-wayradio aaerial –– iit iis bbest tto sspeak tto tthe ccarwash ooperator.

Washing tthe vvehicle bby hhand

❀In tthe iinterests oof eenvironmentalprotection tthe vvehicle sshould

only bbe wwashed iin sspecially pprovidedwash bbays. IIn ssome ddistricts, wwash-ing ccars eelsewhere mmay eeven bbe ffor-bidden.First soften the dirt with plenty of waterand rinse off as well as possible. Thenclean the car with aa ssoft ssponge, ggloveor bbrush starting on the roof and goingfrom top to bottom using oonly sslightpressure eespecially wwhen ccleaning ttheheadlight aarea. Paint shampoo, prefer-ably with a neutral pH, should only beused for very persistent dirt. Rinse thesponge or glove out thoroughly at shortintervals.Wheels and sill panels should be cleanedlast, using a different sponge if possible.After cleaning the vehicle, rinse thor-oughly with water and leather it off.

Note

• The vehicle should not be washed instrong sunshine.

• If the vehicle is rinsed with a hose, donot direct the jet of water at the lock cylin-ders and the door/boot lid/tailgate shutlines – they can freeze up in the winter.

Washing vvehicle wwith hhighpressure ccleaner

• The operating instructions for the highpressure cleaner must be followed closely– particularly with regard to pressure andworking distance.

• Do not use a concentrated jet.

• The water temperature must not beabove 60°C.

WarningTyres mmust nnever bbe ccleaned wwitha cconcentrated jjet! EEven aat aa rrela-tively llarge wworking ddistance aand aavery sshort sspraying ttime, ddamagecan ooccur.

ConservationRegular application of protection prod-ucts protects the vehicle paintwork to alarge extent against the environmentalinfluences listed under “Washing” on theprevious page and even against lightmechanical damage.At the latest when water on the cleanpaint does not form small drops and rolloff, the vehicle should be protected byapplying a coat of good hard wax. Evenwhen a wax solution is used regularly inthe washing water it is advisable to pro-tect the paint with a coat of hard wax atleast twice a year.



PolishingShould only be done if paint has lost itsshine and gloss cannot be brought backwith wax. If the polish used does not con-tain preservative compounds, the paintmust be waxed afterwards.

NoteMatt ppainted aand pplastic pparts sshouldnot bbe ttreated wwith ppolish oor hhard wwax.

Paint ddamageSmall marks in the paint such as scratchesor stone damage should be touched upimmediately with paint before the metalstarts to rust.However, should rust be found at any timeit must be removed thoroughly and thenthe area treated first with an anti-corro-sion primer and then the correct paintapplied. The number of the original vehicle paint isgiven on the data sticker which is insidethe boot in the spare wheel housing.

WindowsRemove snow and ice from windows andmirrors with a plastic scraper only. Toavoid scratches due to dirt on the glass,the scraper should only be pushed in onedirection and not moved to and fro.Traces of rubber, oil, wax1), grease or sili-cone can be removed with a windowcleaning solution or a silicone remover.

1) This wax residue can only be removed with aspecial cleaner.

The windows should also be cleaned onthe inside at regular intervals.Do not dry the windows with the leatherused for the paintwork because traces ofpaint cleaner will cause streaks to appearon the glass, which will hinder vision.To avoid damaging the heating elementwires in the rear window do not put stick-ers over the wires on the inside.

Door, bboot aand wwindow ssealsThe weatherstrips will remain flexible andlast longer if they are rubbed lightly with arubber protective compound from time totime. This will also stop the weatherstripsfrom freezing on in winter.

Door llock ccylinderYou should only use an appropriate spray,which has lubricating and anti-corrosivequalities, to de-ice the lock cylinder.

Plastic pparts aand lleatheretteExterior plastic parts are cleaned with nor-mal washing and interior parts with adamp cloth. If this is not sufficient, theseparts aand lleatherette mmay oonly bbecleaned wwith sspecial pplastic ccleanersthat aare ffree ffrom aalcohol aand oother ssol-vents.

NoteThe use of liquid air conditioners directlyover the air vents of the vehicle may dam-age the plastic parts if the liquid is acci-dentally spilled over them.



Upholstery ccloth aand ttextile ttrimUpholstery cloth and textile trim on doorpanels, parcel shelves, luggage compart-ment covers, headlining etc. must becleaned with special cleaners or dry foamand a soft brush.

Natural lleatherLeather should, depending on usage, betreated from time to time in accordancewith the following instructions. It must benoted that on no account may solvents,floor wwax, sshoe ppolish, sspot rremoversand ssimilar pproducts bbe uused ffor tthispurpose.To clean leather a cotton or woollen clothlightly moistened with water should beused for the dirty surfaces.Dirtier areas may be cleaned with a mildsoap solution (2 dessert spoonfuls ofneutral soap to 1 litre of water). Makesure that the leather iis nnot mmade ttoowet and that no water seeps through theseams. After cleaning, wipe dry with asoft cloth.Furthermore we recommend that, withnormal usage, the leather is treated athalf yearly intervals with a special leathercare agent. Apply one coat and clean offwith a soft cloth once it has taken effect.

Cleaning sseat bbeltsKeep bbelts cclean. TThey mmay nnot rretractproperly iif vvery ddirty.Dirty belts can be cleaned by washingwith a mild soap solution without takingthe belts out of the vehicle.

NoteInertia reel belts should be completely drybefore they are allowed to roll up.

Warning

• The sseat bbelts mmust nnot bberemoved ffor ccleaning.

• Do nnot hhave tthe bbelts ccleanedchemically bbecause tthe ccleaningcompounds ddamage tthe wwebbingmaterial. EEnsure tthat tthe bbelts ddonot ccome iinto ccontact wwith ccorro-sive ffluids.

• You sshould ccheck tthe cconditionof yyour sseat bbelts rregularly. IIf yyoufind aany ddamage tto tthe bbelt wweb-bing, bbelt cconnections, tthe bbeltretractor oor tthe llocking pparts, tthebelt iin qquestion mmust bbe rreplacedby aa TTechnical SService CCentre.



Steel wwheelsThe wheels and the wheel trims should becleaned thoroughly at regular intervalswhen the vehicle is being washed. Thiswill prevent brake dust, dirt and road saltfrom accumulating on the wheel.Persistent ingrained brake dust can beremoved with an industrial grime remover.Paint damage should be repaired beforerust can form.

Alloy wwheels*In order to maintain alloy wheel trims inperfect condition for a long period, regu-lar care is necessary. Above all, road saltand brake pad dust must be washed offthoroughly at least every two weeks, oth-erwise the surface of the alloy will bedamaged. After being washed, the wheelsshould be treated with an acid-freecleaner for alloy wheels. About everythree months it is necessary to givewheels a good rubbing with hard wax.Paint polish or other abrasive solutionsmust not be used. If the protective paintcoat has been damaged, e.g. by stoneimpact, the damaged spots should bedealt with as soon as possible.

WarningPlease nnote wwhen ccleaning tthewheels tthat ddampness, iice aandgrit ccan hhave aa nnegative eeffect oonthe bbraking ppower.

Cleaning aand aanti-corrosiontreatment oof eengine ccompartment

Warning

• Before wworking iin tthe eenginecompartment nnote iinstructions iinthe ""Engine ccompartment" cchap-ter.

• For ssafety rreasons ppull oout iigni-tion kkey bbefore rreaching iinto tthewater bbox. OOtherwise iif tthe wwind-screen wwipers aare sswitched oonunintentionally tthe mmovement oofthe wwiper llink ccould ccause iinjury.

The leaves, blossoms etc. which drop intothe water box (underneath the enginebonnet in front of the windscreen) shouldbe cleaned out occasionally. This will pre-vent the water drain holes from becomingblocked and – on vehicles without a dustand pollen filter – foreign bodies enteringthe vehicle interior via the heating andventilation system.The engine compartment and the outsidesurface of the power unit are given anti-corrosion treatment at the factory.In the winter when the vehicle is beingdriven frequently on salted roads, goodanti-corrosion treatment is very impor-tant. For this reason the entire enginecompartment and the plenum chambershould be thoroughly cleaned before andafter the salting period and then pre-served so that the salt cannot have adamaging effect.



The iignition mmust bbe sswitched ooffbefore wwashing tthe eengine.Do nnot ppoint tthe wwater jjet ddircetly aatthe hheadlights tto aavoid ddamage.If the engine compartment is cleaned atany time with grease removing solutions1)

or if one has the engine washed, the anti-corrosion compound is nearly alwaysremoved as well. It is therefore essentialto ask for durable preservation of all sur-faces, seams, joints and components inthe engine compartment to be carriedout. This applies also when corrosion pro-tected parts are renewed.

❀Because wwhen wwashing ttheengine ppetrol, ggrease aand ooil

deposits aare wwashed ooff, tthe ddirtywater mmust bbe ccleaned bby aan ooil ssep-arator. FFor tthis rreason eengine wwash-ing sshould oonly bbe ccarried oout iin aaworkshop oor ffilling sstation.

1) Only the prescribed cleaning products may beused, never use Petrol or Diesel.

UndercoatingThe underside of the vehicle is coatedwith a special compound to protect it fromcorrosion and damage.However, as this protective layer canalways become damaged when the vehi-cle is in use, the protective coating on theunderside of the body and on the runninggear should be examined at defined inter-vals –preferably before and after the win-ter season– and any damage repaired.

WarningNever uuse aadditional uunder ffloorprotection oor aanti-corrosion aagentsfor tthe eexhaust ssilencer, eexhaustpipe, ccatalysts oor hheat sshields.These ssubstances ccould iignitewhilst tthe vvehicle iis iin mmotion.



Note ffor vvehicles wwith aa ccatalyticconverterDue to the high temperatures which occurin the afterburning process, additionalheat shields are fitted over the catalyticconverter. Underbody sealant must not beapplied to these shields, the catalyticconverter or the exhaust pipes. Removalof the heat shields is also not permissi-ble.

Cavity ppreservationAll cavities on the vehicle which could besusceptible to corrosion are given perma-nent protection at the factory.This coating does not need checking orany subsequent treatment. Should asmall amount of wax run out of the cavi-ties at high ambient temperatures it canbe removed with a plastic scraper andsome white spirit.

❀If tthe wwax wwhich hhas rrun oout iisremoved wwith cclean ppetrol, hheed

the eenvironmental pprotection rregula-tions.

3.34 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– CHECKING AND REFILLING


UnlockingPull the lever on the left side panel, underthe instrument panel. The bonnet springsup out of its lock.At the same time, a release lever willappear in the radiator grille. See illustra-tion on the right.

NoteBefore opening the bonnet ensure thatthe wiper arms are not lifted off the wind-screen. Otherwise, damage can occur tothe paintwork.

OpeningLift bonnet slightly and pull the releasegrip in the direction of the arrow (seeillustration to the right) to release thecatch. Let ggo oof tthe rrelease ggrip sso iitcan rreturn tto iits ooriginal pposition.

WarningOnce tthe bbonnet iis oopen ddo nnottouch tthe rrelease ggrip ((locatednext tto tthe rradiator ggrille) nnor ootherelements oof tthe llock. OOtherwisewhen cclosing ddamage ccould ooccurto tthe llocking ssystem aand tthe bbon-net mmay oopen wwhile ddriving.Danger oof aaccident!

Lift bonnet to the stop. The bonnet is heldin position by a gas filled rod.

ClosingHold the bonnet on the side where thegas filled rod is fitted. Press the bonnetdown until the gas filled rod gives wayand then engages. Do nnot ppress ddown iifit ddoes nnot cclose pproperly. OOpenagain aand ppress aas bbefore.

Warning

• For ssafety rreasons, tthe bbonnetmust aalways bbe pproperly cclosedwhen tthe vvehicle iis mmoving.Always ccheck wwhether tthe llock iisengaged bby ppulling uup. FFurther-more, tthe bbonnet mmust bbe fflushwith tthe aadjacent bbody ppanels.

• If yyou sshould nnotice tthat tthe llockis nnot eengaged, sstop tthe vvehicleimmediately aand cclose tthe bbonnet.

Engine bbonnet

B8L-035 LEO-029

CHECKING AND REFILLING ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.35


WarningParticular ccare sshould bbe ttakenwhen wworking iin tthe eengine ccom-partment!

• Switch ooff eengine, rremove iigni-tion kkey.

• Pull hhandbrake oon ffirmly.

• Move ggear llever iinto nneutral oor,in aautomatic ggearboxes, iin ““P”position.

• Allow eengine tto ccool ooff.

• As llong aas tthe eengine iis aat ooper-ating ttemperature:–Do nnot pput yyour hhand iinto tthe

radiator ffan, iit ccould sswitch oonsuddenly.

–Do nnot oopen tthe rradiator ccapbecause tthe ccooling ssystem iisunder ppressure.

• Never sspill aany lliquids oover tthehot eengine. TThese lliquids ccouldignite.

• Avoid ccausing sshort ccircuits iinthe eelectrical ssystem –– pparticularlyat tthe bbattery.

• If ttests hhave tto bbe ccarried ooutwith tthe eengine rrunning, tthere iisan aadditional ddanger ppresent ffromrotating pparts –– ee.g. VV-belts, ggen-erator, rradiator ffan eetc. –– aand ffromthe hhigh vvoltage iignition ssystem.

• If wwork oon tthe ffuel oor eelectricalsystem iis nnecessary:–Disconnect tthe bbattery ffrom tthe

vehicle eelectrics–Do nnot ssmoke–Never wwork nnear nnaked fflames–Always kkeep aa ffire eextinguisher

in tthe vvicinity.

• Attention mmust bbe ppaid tto tthewarnings ggiven iin tthis MManual aandto tthe ggenerally aapplicable ssafetyregulations.

When ttopping uup ffluids ddo nnot ccon-fuse tthem wwith eeach oother uunder aanycircumstances, ootherwise sseriousfunctional ddefects mmay ooccur.

❀The gground uunderneath tthe vvehi-cle sshould bbe cchecked rregularly.

If sspots ccaused bby ooil oor oother ffluidscan bbe sseen, tthe vvehicle sshould bbetaken tto aa TTechnical SService CCentrefor cchecking.

Engine ccompartment



77 kkW ppetrol eenginesPage

1 – Windscreen washer container.....3.502 – Coolant expansion tank..............3.413 – Engine oil dipstick .....................3.394 – Engine oil filler opening .............3.395 – Brake fluid reservoir...................3.446 – Vehicle battery...........................3.45The layout of the components may varydepending on the engine.

WarningPlease ttake nnotice oof tthe wwarningnotes oon tthe pprevious ppage.

81 kkW ddiesel eenginesPage

1 – Windscreen washer container.....3.502 – Coolant expansion tank..............3.413 – Engine oil dipstick .....................3.394 – Engine oil filler opening .............3.395 – Brake fluid reservoir...................3.446 – Vehicle battery...........................3.45

WarningPlease ttake nnotice oof tthe wwarningnotes oon tthe pprevious ppage.

TO8-036 TO8-038

CHECKING AND REFILLING –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.37


SpecificationsThe engine comes with a special, highquality, multi grade oil that can be used inall seasons of the year except for thoseregions affected by extreme cold.As the use of high quality oil is essentialfor the correct operation of the engineand its long useful life, when topping upor replacement is necessary use onlythose oils that conform to the require-ments of the VW standards.If it is not possible to find oil conformingto the VW standards then oil conformingto the ACEA or API standards with anappropriate viscosity at atmospheric tem-perature should be used instead. The useof this type of oil may have some reper-cussions on the performance of theengine for example, long starting time,increased consumption and a higheremission level.If a top up is required then different oilsmay be mixed as long as they all conformto the VW standards.The specifications (VW standards) set outin the following page should appear onthe container of the service oil; the con-tainer will display together the differentstandards for petrol and diesel engines,the oil can be used for both types ofengines.

Oil pproperties

ViscosityThe viscosity class is selected accordingto the diagram above. If atmospheric tem-perature falls outside of the describedlimits for only a short period then an oilchange is not necessary.

Engine ooil

B1H-149



Mono-grade ooilMono-grade oils cannot be used through-out the whole year due to their limitedrange of viscosity2). These oils are only useful in a climate thatis constantly very cold or very warm.

Engine ooil aadditivesNo type of additive should be mixed withthe engine oil. The deterioration causedby these additives is not covered by theguarantee.

NoteBefore aa llong ttrip, wwe rrecommendfinding aan eengine ooil tthat cconforms ttothe ccorresponding VVW sspecificationsand kkeeping iit iin tthe vvehicle. IIn tthisway tthe rrequired ooil wwill bbe aavailableif nneeded.

1) Diesel engines that have fuel iinjection bbasedon aa ffuel iinjector ppump should use only oilspecification VW 5505 001. AAvoid tthe uuse oofany oother ooil ttype tthan VVW 5505 001 ffor tthisengine. WWarning! PPossible eengine ddam-age!

2) Viscosity: Oil density

Denomination Specification Comments

A – synthetic oil VW 502 00 VW 500 00 Dated after 1-97

B – mineral oil VW 501 01 Dated after 1-97

A/B – multi-grade oil ACEA A2 or A3 or even Dated after 1-97API SH/SJ

Petrol eengine

Denomination Specification Comments

A – synthetic oil VW 505 011) Dated after 1-97

B – mineral oil VW 505 00 Dated after 1-97

A/B – multi-grade oil ACEA B2 or B3 or even Dated after 1-97API CD/CF

Diesel eengine



Checking ooil llevelEvery engine uses a certain amount of oil.The oil consumption can be up to 1.0litres per 1000 km. The engine oil levelmust therefore be checked at regularintervals, preferably when filling the tankand before a long journey.The location of the dipstick A can bedetermined from the illustrations on page3.36.The vehicle must be on a level surfacewhen checking the oil level. After stop-ping engine wait a few minutes for the oilto drain back to the sump.Then pull the dipstick out, wipe it with aclean cloth and insert again.Then pull dipstick out again and check theoil level:a– Oil must be topped up.

Afterwards it suffices when the oil levelis somewhere in area (b).

b– Oil can be topped up.It can then happen that the oil level isin area (c).

c– Oil must nnot be topped up.

When the engine is working hard such asin sustained high-speed motorway cruis-ing in summer, when towing a trailer orwhen climbing mountain passes, the oillevel should be kept at area (c) – nnotabove.

Topping uup eengine ooilUnscrew the cap from oil filler opening Band pour oil in 0.5 litres at a time. Thencheck level with the dipstick.On nno aaccount sshould tthe ooil llevel bbeabove aarea cc. OOtherwise ooil ccan bbedrawn iinto tthe eengine vvia tthe ccrank-case bbreather aand eescape iinto ttheatmosphere vvia tthe eexhaust ssystem.On vvehicles ffitted wwith aa ccatalytic ccon-verter, tthe ooil ccould bburn iinside ttheconverter ccausing iit tto bbecome ddam-aged.

WarningWhen ttopping uup tthe ooil, ddo nnotspill iit oonto hhot eengine ccompo-nents –– ddanger oof ffire.

Carefully close the filler cap and push theoil dipstick in as far as possible, this willprevent oil spill when the engine is run-ning.

TO8-038A



Changing eengine ooilThe eengine ooil mmust bbe cchanged aatthe iintervals ggiven iin tthe IInspectionand MMaintenance PPlan. WWe tthereforerecommend tthat tthe ooil cchange bbedone bby aa TTechnical SService CCentre.

WarningIf yyou wwant tto cchange tthe eengineoil yyourself, yyou mmust nnote tthe ffol-lowing ppoints:

• Allow tthe eengine tto ccool ddownfirst tto aavoid tthe ddanger oof bbeingscalded bby hhot eengine ooil.

• Use aan aappropriate ccontainer ttodrain ooff tthe ooil. IIt sshould bbe bbigenough tto hhold tthe qquantity oof ooilin yyour eengine.

• Wear pprotective gglasses ffor yyoureyes.

• When rremoving tthe ooil ddrainplug wwith yyour ffingers, kkeep yyourarm hhorizontal sso tthat tthe ooilbeing ddrained ccannot rrun ddownyour aarm.

• If yyour hhands ccome iinto ccontactwith eengine ooil yyou mmust wwashthem tthoroughly aafterwards.

• Old ooil mmust bbe sstored oout oofreach oof cchildren uuntil iit iis ddis-posed oof iin tthe ccorrect mmanner.

❀On nno aaccount sshould ooil bbepoured ddown ddrains oor iinto tthe

earth.Because oof tthe ddisposal pproblems,the nnecessary sspecial ttools aand sspe-cialised kknowledge rrequired, ttheengine ooil aand ffilter cchanging sshouldpreferably bbe ddone bby aa TTechnicalService CCentre.

Engine ooil aadditivesNo aadditives sshould bbe mmixed wwiththe eengine ooil.



The cooling system is filled at the factorywith a permanent coolant which is notchanged.The coolant consists of water and a 40%concentration of our coolant additive G12+ (glycol-based anti-freeze with anti-corrosion additives). This mixture not onlygives the necessary frost protection downto –25 °C but also protects the alloy partsin the cooling system against corrosion.In addition it prevents scaling and signifi-cantly raises the boiling point of thecoolant. The concentration of the coolant thereforemust not be reduced in the summer or inwarm countries, by topping up with plainwater. The ccoolant aadditive pproportionmust bbe aat lleast 440%.If greater protection against frost isrequired, the proportion of G12+ additivecan be increased, but only uup tto 660%(frost protection to approx. –40 °C), oth-erwise the anti-freeze protection isreduced and furthermore the coolingeffect is impaired.Vehicles for export to cold countries (e.g.Sweden, Norway, Finland) usually havefrost protection down to –35 °C (50% G12+)approximately.

Other aadditives can bbe vvery ddetrimen-tal tto tthe aanti-corrosion eeffect iin ppar-ticular.The ssubsequent ccorrosion ddamagecan llead tto ccoolant lloss rresulting iinmajor eengine ddamage.

Note

• Only oour GG12+ ((purple ccolour) sshouldbe uused aas aan aantifreeze aadditive.Observe tthe nnotice oon tthe ccontainer.The ccooling lliquid mmay bbe ppurchasedin TTechnical SServices.

• The aantifreeze aadditive GG12+ ccan bbemixed wwith oother aadditives ((G11 aandG12).

• The aadditive GG12 ((red ccolour)should nnever bbe mmixed wwith GG11.

Cooling ssystem



Checking ccoolant llevel

WarningNever oopen tthe bbonnet iif yyou ccansee ssteam oor ccoolant lleaving ttheengine ccompartment –– RRisk oofscalding! WWait uuntil nno mmore ssteamor ccoolant ccan bbe sseen.

The level can only be checked properlywhen the engine is not running.The coolant level must be between themax and min marks on the expansiontank when engine is cold and can beslightly above the max mark when it iswarm.

Coolant llossesCoolant loss normally indicates leaks inthe system. In this case the cooling sys-tem should be checked by a TechnicalService Centre without delay. It is not suf-ficient merely to add coolant. In a sealed system losses can only occur ifthe boiling point of the coolant isexceeded as a result of overheating, andcoolant is forced out of the system.

Topping uup ccoolantSwitch engine off and let it cool down.Then cover expansion tank cap with acloth and turn cap carefully anti-clockwiseand remove.

WarningDo nnot rremove eexpansion ttank ccapwhen eengine iis hhot –– ddanger oofscalding:System iis uunder ppressure.

No other coolant may be used if G12+ isnot available. In this case only water canbe used and the correct mixture concen-tration must be restored with the speci-fied coolant additive (see previous page)as soon as possible.

Please aalso rrefer tto tthe ffurther nnoteson tthe nnext ppage.

B8L-072



If a lot of coolant has been lost, only addcold coolant after the engine has cooleddown. This will prevent engine damage.Do nnot ffill aabove tthe mmax mmark.The excess coolant will be forced outthrough the pressure relief valve in thecap when engine becomes hot.Screw ccap oon aagain ttightly.

WarningThe ccoolant aadditive aand tthecoolant aare aa ddanger tto hhealth. TTheadditive mmust ttherefore oonly bbestored iin tthe ooriginal ccontainerwell oout oof rreach oof cchildren. IIf tthecoolant hhas tto bbe ddrained aat aanytime iit mmust bbe ccaught aand aalsostored iin aa ssafe pplace.

❀Drained ccoolant sshould nnot nnor-mally bbe rreused, iit mmust bbe ddis-

posed oof, bbearing iin mmind eenviron-mental pprotection rregulations.

The radiator fan is driven electrically andcontrolled by a thermoswitch from thecoolant temperature (also from theengine compartment temperature onsome models).

WarningAfter tthe eengine hhas bbeen sstoppedthe ffan ccan ccontinue rrunning ffor aawhile –– eeven wwith tthe eengineswitched ooff ((up tto aabout 110 mmin-utes). IIt ccan aalso sstart tto rrun aagainsuddenly aafter aa sshort ttime iif– tthe ccoolant ttemperature iincrea-

ses ddue tto hheat bbuild uup– wwhen tthe eengine iis hhot aand tthe

engine ccompartment iis hheatedadditionally bby sstrong ssunlight.

Special ccare mmust ttherefore bbetaken wwhen wworking iin tthe eenginecompartment.

Radiator ffan



The brake fluid reservoir is on the lefthand side of the engine compartment.On vehicles with ABS* the reservoir is inthe same place but its design is different.

NoteOn vehicles with right-hand drive thereservoir is on the other side of theengine compartment.

Checking ffluid llevelThe fluid level must always be betweenthe “MAX” and “MIN” marks to ensureperfect operation.The level of fluid tends to sink slightlywhen the vehicle is used due to the auto-matic adjustment of brake linings. This isquite normal.If the level were to drop rapidly or belowthe minimum mark MIN the brake systemmay be leaking. The corresponding pilotlight lights up if the level is too low (see“Warning lamps” chapter). Go tto aaTechnical SService CCentre iimmediatelyand hhave tthe bbrake ssystem cchecked.

Renewing tthe bbrake ffluidBrake fluid absorbs moisture. In thecourse of time it takes in water from theatmosphere. Too high a content of waterin the brake fluid system can cause corro-sion damage. Furthermore the boilingpoint of the brake fluid is reduced consid-erably. For tthis rreason tthe bbrake ffluidmust bbe rrenewed eevery ttwo yyears.

WarningWhen tthe bbrake ffluid bbecomes ttooold, vvapour bbubbles ccan fform iinthe bbrake ssystem wwhen tthe bbrakesare uused vvigorously. TThe eefficiencyof tthe bbrakes aand tthus tthe vvehiclesafety aare sseriously rreduced.

Only our genuine brake fluid should beused (specification according to US FMVSS 116 DOT 4 Standard). The fluid mustbe new.

WarningBrake ffluid iis ppoisonous! IIt mmusttherefore oonly bbe sstored iin ttheclosed ooriginal ccontainer oout oofreach oof cchildren.

Remember aalso tthat bbrake ffluid wwillattack tthe ppaintwork.

❀Because oof tthe ddisposal pprob-lems, tthe sspecial ttools nnecessary

and tthe sspecialist kknowledgerequired, bbrake ffluid sshould pprefer-ably bbe cchanged aat aa TTechnicalService CCentre.It is advisable to have the fluid changedone during an Inspection Service.

Brake ffluid

B8L-073



Battery

Warning nnotes

Wear eeye pprotection. DDo nnotallow pparticles ccontainingacid oor llead tto ccome iintocontact wwith tthe eeyes, sskin

or cclothes.

Battery aacid iis hhighly ccaus-tic. AAlways wwear pprotectivegloves aand gglasses. DDo nnottip bbattery –– aacid ccan sspill

out oof tthe vvents. SShould aacid ccomeinto ccontact wwith tthe eeyes, rrinsefor sseveral mminutes uusing cclean rrun-ning water. SSeek mmedical aassis-tance iimmediately. SShould aacidcome iinto ccontact wwith sskin oorclothes, nneutralise iimmediatelyusing aan aalkaline ssoap ssolutionand rrinse tthroughly. SShould aacidinadvertently bbe ddrunk, sseek mmed-ical aattention iimmediately.

Keep wwell cclear oof nnakedflame aand ssparks. DDo nnotsmoke. AAvoid ggeneratingsparks wwhen hhandling

cables aand eelectrical ccomponents.Avoid sshort ccircuits. NNever sshortbattery tterminals –– ddanger oofinjury ffrom hhigh eenergy ssparks.

When bbattery iis bbeingcharged, aa hhighly eexplosivemixture oof ggasses iis ppro-duced.

Keep aacid aand bbattery oout oofthe rreach oof cchildren.

• Disconnect ppositive tterminal oofbattery bbefore ddoing aany wwork oonthe eelectrical ssystem. WWhenchanging bbulbs iit iis ssufficient ttoswitch ooff llamp.

• When ddisconnecting tthe bbatteryfrom tthe vvehicle eelectrical ssystemfirst ddisconnect tthe nnegative ccableand tthen tthe ppositive ccable.The bbattery mmust nnot bbe ddiscon-nected wwith tthe eengine rrunning, aasthis wwill ddamage tthe eelectrical ssys-tem ((electronic ccomponents).

• When rreconnecting tthe bbattery,first cconnect tthe ppositive ccable,then tthe nnegative. OOn nno aacountmay tthe ccable bbe iinterchanged.Risk oof ccables bburning!

Do nnot ddisconnect tthe vvehicle bbatterywhen tthe iignition iis oon oor wwhen ttheengine iis rrunning, aas tthe eelectricalsystem ((electronic ccomponents)could ootherwise bbe ddamaged. In oorder tto pprotect tthe ccasing ffrom UUVradiation, ddo nnot eexpose vvehicle bbat-tery tto ddirect ssunlight.



LocationThe battery is in the engine compartment.Start with the help of another battery. See"Emergency starting" chapter.

Checking aacid llevelTake the following warnings of the"Engine compartment" chapter intoaccount before starting any type of workon the engine or the engine compart-ment.The acid/electrolyte level should bechecked regularly in the following cases:– high mileage– in countries with a warm climate– old batteryThe battery is otherwise service-free.The acid level should always be aroundthe max. mark on the longside of the bat-tery. It should never be filled above themax. mark nor be allowed to drop belowthe min. mark.It is recommended that the acid level bechecked and corrected by a TechnicalService Centre.

Battery wwith aa mmagic eeye*A round viewing window is located on theupper side of the battery (see arrow). Thismagic eye will change its color accordingto the charge condition or the acid level ofthe battery.Air bubbles can distort the true color. Youshould, therefore, tap carefully on themagic eye.If the display in the viewing window hasno color or is light yellow, the acid level inthe battery is too low. Distilled water mustbe added. We recommend that the batterybe replaced if it is older than 5 years.It is recommended that the acid level bechecked and corrected by a TechnicalService Centre.The colour displays of green and black areonly of use to the Technical Service Centresince it facilitates the diagnosis of thebattery.

B6E-030D



Charging the bbatteryBefore charging, switch off the engineand all electrical consumers.When charging with a low current (e.g.with a small charger) the battery cablesneed not normally be taken off. Theinstructions from the battery charger man-ufacturer must, however, be noted.In order to connect the positive cable, thecover of the fuse holder on the batterymust first be moved to the side. See page3.49.Before quick ccharging, that is chargingwith a high current, both battery cablesmust be disconnected.Please nnote tthe ffollowing ppoints:

Warning

• Keep cchildren aaway ffrom tthe bbat-tery, tthe bbattery aacid aand tthecharger.

• Only ccharge tthe bbattery iin aa wwellventilated rroom. DDo nnot ssmokeand aallow nno nnaked fflames oor eelec-tric ssparks nnear tthe bbattery, aas aahighly eexplosive ggas iis pproducedwhilst tthe bbattery iis bbeingcharged.

• Protect yyour eeyes aand fface. DDonot bbend oover tthe bbattery.

• Should aacid ccome iinto ccontactwith tthe eeyes oor sskin, rrinse ffor ssev-eral mminutes uusing cclear wwater.You sshould tthen sseek mmedicalassistance iimmediately.

• Fast ccharging aa bbattery iis ddan-gerous aand sshould oonly bbe ddone aata TTechnical SService CCentre, aas sspe-cial eequipment aand sskills aareneeded.

• Never ccharge aa ffrozen bbattery.Risk oof eexplosion! AA ffrozen bbatterymust bbe tthawed bbefore ccharging.

We rrecommend tthat bbatteries sshouldno llonger bbe uused aafter tthawing, aasthe bbattery hhousing ccould hhave ssplitinside bbecause oof iice fformation, aandthe aacid mmay lleak oout.

• When charging the battery do notremove caps.

• The main cables of the charger shouldnot be connected until the clips of thecharger have been properly secured to thebattery terminals:red........................................= positiveblack, brown or blue..............= negative

• After charging the battery, first switchoff the charger and disconnect the maincables. Then disconnect the clips of thecharger from the battery.



What hhappens wwhen tthe bbattery iisdisconnected aand tthenreconnected ....After reconnecting the battery to theonboard electronics, you should reset thedigital clock.The automatic opening and closing func-tion of the electric windows should alsobe reactivated.

Removing tthe bbattery

• Before removing the battery turn off theignition and all electrical consumers.

• Press both spring clips in the directionof the arrow 1 and fold the cover of thefuse holder to the side (arrow 2).

Please aalso rrefer tto tthe ffurther nnoteson tthe nnext ppage.

B1J-081D



• Then remove the negative cable A (nor-mally black, brown or blue).

• Then slightly loosen the nut B on thepositive terminal.

• First unclip the front retainer (arrow 1)and then the rear retainer (arrow 2) fromthe battery. To do this you must press theretainers away from the battery.

• The fuse holder with the positive cablecan now be removed upwards from thebattery and placed to the side.

• Then unscrew the battery bracket C andremove the battery.

Renewing the bbatteryOur batteries have been developed to suittheir fitting location. If the battery has tobe renewed, the new battery must havethe same voltage (12 Volts), shape andsafety features such as central degassingand the plugs must be sealed with an O-ring.

New output and capacity should be thesame as the old battery. Technical ServiceCentres have a range of suitable batteries.

❀Because oof tthe pproblem oof ddis-posing oof tthe oold bbattery, tthe

renewal sshould ppreferably ddone aat aaTechnical SService CCentre. BBatteriescontain, aamongst oother tthings, ssul-phuric aacid aand llead aand mmust oon nnoaccount bbe pput wwith nnormal hhouse-hold wwaste.

Installing tthe bbattery

• Switch off the ignition and all electricalconsumers before installing the battery.

• Place the battery in the designatedinstallation location. Please ensure thatthe bracket lug C lines up again with thesame depth of the clamping strip. Thensecure the battery.

• Place the fuse holder together with thepositive cable on the battery so that theretainers on the sides of the batteryengage.

• Then tighten the nut B on the positiveterminal.

• Then connect the negative cable A tothe battery.

• Fold the cover of the fuse holder backand allow both of the spring clips toengage.

B1J-082D



The fluid container is on the right of theengine compartment. The container holdsabout 3 litres: on vehicles with a head-light washer system* it holds about5.5 litres.

Filling tthe ccontainerYou need to add a window cleaning solu-tion with a wax remover to the water.There are several appropriate pproducts,containing iisopropilic aalcohol oormethylated sspirits with wax dissolvingproperties (with anti-freeze additive inwinter) on the market, because plainwater is not usually sufficient to clean theglass and headlight lenses quickly andthoroughly. The mixing ratios on the win-dow cleaner packaging must be adheredto.Even when heated wwindscreen wwasherjets* are fitted, a window cleaning solu-tion containing anti-freeze should beadded to the water in the winter.

NoteTo avoid a possible error by the fluid levelsensor, the pproportion oof aalcohol aandwater sshould bbe 335% aalcohol aand65% wwater aapproximately.For aadditional aassistance ggo tto aaTechnical SService CCentre. Under nno ccircumstances sshould yyouadd ccoolant aanti-freeze oor oother aaddi-tives.

Adjusting wwasher jjetsThe jet for the rear window washer is inthe wiper shaft. The water jet should hitthe glass in the centre of the wiped area.The jets for the headlight washer system*can only be adjusted with a special tool.When adjustment is necessary, contact aTechnical Service Centre.

Windscreen wwasher

B8L-075 TO8-039

SERVICING AND REPLACING ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.51


Your vvehicle iis bbuilt iin aaccordancewith tthe mmost mmodern pprinciples oofsafety ttechnology aand ooffers tthere-fore aa hhigh ddegree oof aactive aandpassive ssafety. TTo eensure tthat tthisremains sso tthe vvehicle aas ssupplied bbythe ffactory mmay nnot bbe mmodified wwith-out ccareful tthought. TThe ffollowingpoints mmust bbe nnoted iif tthe vvehicle iisto bbe ssubsequently ffitted wwith aacces-sories, ttechnically mmodified oor hhaveparts rrenewed llater oon:

• Always consult a Technical ServiceCentre before purchasing accessories andbefore any modifications are carried out.

• Approved accessories and original SEATspare parts may be obtained through theTechnical Services who will also, natu-rally, carry out the corresponding assem-bly in the required conditions.

• Appliances which have been retro–fit-ted and have a direct influence on the dri-ver’s control of the vehicle e.g. cruise con-trol system or electronically controlledshock absorber systems must have the e1)

symbol and be authorised for that vehi-cle.

• Additionally connected electric con-sumers e.g. refrigerators, horns, fans etc.which are not directly linked to the controlof the vehicle must carry the CE symbol2).

1) e – European Community authorisation sym-bol.

2) CE – Manufacturer conformity declaration inthe European Community.

Warning

• We iinform yyou tthat eexpresslyapproved SSEAT3) accessories aandGenuine SSEAT pparts are aavailablefor yyour vvehicle. TThe rreliability,safety aand ssuitability oof tthose ppartsand aaccessories hhave bbeen eespe-cially aadapted ffor yyour vvehicle.

• Despite ccontinuous mmarketobservation wwe ccannot aassess ooraccept rresponsibility ffor ootherproducts, eeven iin ccases wwhere aanofficially rrecognised ppermit hhasbeen iissued.

• Accessories ssuch aas ttelephoneretainers oor ddrinks hholders mmustnever bbe aattached tto tthe AAir BBagcovers oor wwithin ttheir aarea oof eeffec-tiveness. TThey ccould ccause iinjuryif tthe AAir BBag iis aactivated dduringan aaccident!

• If technical modifications are to bemade, our guidelines must be observed.This is to ensure that no damage occurs tothe vehicle, the traffic and operatingsafety is retained and that the modifica-tions are permissible.

3) Not available in all countries.

Accessories, mmodifications aand rreplacement oof pparts

3.52 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SERVICING AND REPLACING


The spark plugs are renewed during theSEAT Inspection Service.If the spark plugs have to be renewedbetween the Inspection Services, the fol-lowing should be noted:

• Spark plugs and ignition system arematched to the engine and as such con-tribute to reducing the levels of exhaustpollutants. To avoid faulty operation,engine damage and even the withdrawalof the type approval due to excessiveemissions values or non-suppressedspark plugs, only the Genuine spark plugsfor the engine concerned should be used.Important, among other things, are thenumber of electrodes, the heat value andif necessary the radio suppression.

• The plugs may be, for technical rea-sons, modified at short notice.

Spark pplugs


SERVICING AND REPLACING ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.53

The dust and pollen filter for the heatingand ventilation system can be foundunder the cover on the right in the plenumchamber. The ffilter sshould bbe cchangedin aaccordance wwith tthe ddetails ggivenin tthe IInspection aand SService ssched-ule. IIf tthe aair tthroughput rreduces ccon-siderably, tthe ffilter sshould bbechanged eearlier:

Removing ffilter

• Pull up the rubber seal A of the plenumchamber to the middle.

• Carefully unscrew all screws B com-pletely and pull the cover off to the front.Because of their shape they will remainsuspended in the cover. Pull the coveroutwards.

• Push back spring clips C in the direc-tion of the arrow and remove the filterinsert.

Dust aand ppollen ffilter*

TO8-040 B1J-034


3.54 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– SERVICING AND REPLACING

Installing ffilterFor greater clarity, the illustration showsthe dust and pollen filter already disman-tled.Push the filter into the recesses of the fil-ter unit with the lugs D first. Then press the filter down at the frontuntil the spring clips C engage on the lugsE.Screw the cover on tightly and press therubber seal A onto the plenum chamber.

B11-060D


IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.55

In some countries a luminous hazardwarning triangle must be carried in thevehicle to be used in an emergency, aswell as a first aid kit and spare bulbs.The first aid kit can be stored in the sparewheel recess. The warning triangle can beplaced at the rear of the boot using rubberbands.

NoteThe first aid kit and warning triangle arenot delivered with the vehicle as standardfittings.

Recommendations

• The ffirst aaid kkit aand wwarning ttrian-gle mmust ffulfil llegal rrequirements.

• You sshould bbear iin mmind tthe uuse-bydates oof tthe ccontents oof tthe ffirst aaidkit.

First aaid kkit, wwarning ttriangle


3.56 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN

Tool hhousingThe tools and the spare wheel are storedin the housing under the boot floor cover-ing.In order to have both hands free to lift outthe spare wheel and the on board tools,the floor mat can be hooked to the lowerpart of the rear shelf.

The tools are located in a polystyreneretainer, inside the spare wheel recesssecured with a rubber strap.

WarningEnsure tthat tthe vvehicle ttools aandspare wwheel aare sstowed ssecurelyto aavoid iinjuries ffor tthe ppassengerin ccase oof aa ccollision oor ssuddenbraking.

On bboard ttools, sspare wwheel

B45-079C


IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.57

Vehicle ttools // jjack

Warning

• The jjack ssupplied bby tthe ffactoryis oonly ddesigned ffor yyour vvehiclemodel. OOn nno aaccount sshouldheavier vvehicles oor oother lloads bbelifted!

• With tthe vvehicle llifted, nneverstart tthe eengine –– ddanger oof aacci-dent.

• If wwork hhas tto bbe ddone uunder-neath tthe vvehicle, eensure tthat iit iissupported oon ssuitable sstands. Vehicles mmay aalso hhave:

1 – Screwdriver with box spanner in han-dle for the wheel bolts. The screw-driver blade is reversible.

2 – Open jaw spanner 10 x 133 – Jack

Before the jack is placed back into thetool box, the claw must be fullywound back. The crank is then ten-sioned against the side of the jack.

4 – Wire hook* for wheel trims5 – Wheel bolt spanner6 – Front towing ring

NoteNever use the box spanner in the handleof the screwdriver to loosen or tightenwheel bolts.

IB9-086


3.58 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN

Spare wwheelThe wheel is located in the well under thefloor covering in the luggage compart-ment. It is secured with a small handwheel.

Removing tthe sspare wwheelAttach the floor mat to the lower part ofthe boot cover.Loosen the retaining strap and removethe polystyrene retainer.Then turn the hand wheel in an anti-clock-wise direction and remove it.

Securing tthe sspare wwheel

• Place the defective wheel in the hous-ing and secure with the nut.

• Feed the retaining strap through theholes in the rim – see illustration.

• Turn the handwheel in a clockwisedirection until the wheel is properlysecured.

• Place the polystyrene retainer in therecess and secure it with the retainingstrap.

• Remove the floor mat from the luggagecompartment cover and replace on thefloor of the luggage compartment.

WarningEnsure tthat tthe sspare wwheel, ttow-ing ddevice* aand oon bboard ttools aareproperly ssecured, sso tthat tthey ccan-not iinjure vvehicle ooccupants iif yyouhave tto bbrake ssuddenly oor hhave aanaccident.

B1J-054D B1J-055D


IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.59

General nnotes

• New tyres do not give maximum gripstraight away and should therefore be runin at moderate speeds and a careful styleof driving for about the first 100 km. Thiswill help to make the tyres last longer.

• The tread depth of new tyres can varydue to construction and design features,and depending on version and manufac-tures.

• Check tyres for damage from time totime (cuts, splits, cracks and lumps) andremove any foreign bodies embedded inthe treads.

• To avoid damage to tyres and wheelsdrive over curbs and similar obstaclesvery slowly and as nearly at right anglesas possible.

WarningDamage tto wwheels aand ttyres iis nnotalways eeasy tto ssee. UUnusual vvibra-tions oor aa ppulling tto oone sside ccouldindicate ttyre ddamage. IIf yyou ssus-pect ddamage tto aa ttyre, yyou sshouldimmediately rreduce sspeed. CCheckall ttyres vvisually ffor ddamage(bulges, ttears eetc.). IIf nno eexternaldamage ccan bbe sseen, ddrive ccare-fully tto tthe nnearest TTechnicalService CCentre aand hhave tthe vvehi-cle cchecked oover.

• Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

• Replace missing dust caps as soon aspossible.

• Mark wheels before taking them off sothat they rotate in the same directionwhen put back on again.

• When taken off, the tyres should bestored in a cool, dry and preferably darkplace.Tyres which are not on wheels should bestored in a vertical position.

Note ffor ttyres wwhere tthe ddirection oofrotation iis sstipulatedIt is imperative that the designated direc-tion of rotation for tyre treads (which canbe determined from the arrow on the sideof the tyre) be kept to. The best tyre per-formance i.e. in aquaplaning, road adhe-sion, noise and wear is then guaranteed.

Tyre llifeTyre life depends to a considerable extenton the following factors:

Inflation ppressureThe inflation pressures are to be foundinside the fuel lid.The inflation pressure is very importantparticularly at high speeds. Therefore, thepressures should be checked at least oncea month and before every long journey.

Wheels

At this opportunity do not forget the sparewheel:

• The spare wheel with normal tyreshould always be inflated to the highestpressure required on the vehicle.

• Always check the pressures when thetyres are cold. When warm, the pressure ishigher but do not reduce. If the loadchanges a great deal the pressure mustbe altered to suit. On vehicles with wheel hub caps, valveextensions are fitted. It is not necessary toremove the valve extension piece in orderto test and correct the inflation pressure.Pressures wwhich aare ttoo hhigh oor ttoolow sshorten ttyre llife –– qquite aapartfrom tthe ddetrimental iinfluence oonvehicle hhandling.

WarningAt ccontinuous hhigh sspeeds aa ttyrein wwhich tthe ppressure iis ttoo llowflexes mmore aand hheats uup eexces-sively. TThis ccan ccause ttread ssepa-ration aand ttyre bblow oout.

❀A ppressure wwhich iis ttoo llowincreases tthe ffuel cconsumption

and tthis bburdens tthe eenvironmentunnecessarily.

Mode oof ddrivingFast cornering, hard acceleration and vio-lent braking also increase tyre wear.

Balancing wwheelsThe wheels on new vehicles are balanced.However when the vehicle is running vari-ous influences can cause the wheels tobecome unbalanced and this causessteering vibration.As imbalance also increases steering,suspension and tyre wear the wheelsshould be balanced again. Furthermore awheel should always be rebalanced whenthe tyre has been repaired or when a newtyre has been fitted.

Incorrect wwheel aalignmentIncorrect wheel alignment not only causesexcessive, usually uneven tyre wear, butcan also impair the car ’s safe handling. Ifunusual tyre wear is noticed, contact aTechnical Service Centre.


3.60 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN


IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.61

Wear iindicatorsAt the bottom of the tread of the originaltyres there are 1.6 mm high “wear indica-tors” running across the tread – see fig.There are 6-8 of these indicators – accord-ing to make – evenly spaced around thetyre circumference. Marks on the walls ofthe tyre (for example the letters “TWI” ortriangles) show the locations of the wearindicators.

Warning

• The ttyres mmust bbe rrenewed wwhenthey aare wworn ddown tto tthe wwearindicators.

• Worn ttyres aare ddetrimental ttoroadholding pparticularly aat hhighspeeds oon wwet rroads. FFurthermore,the vvehicle ttends tto aaquaplanesooner.

NoteWhen tread depth is down to 1.6 mmmeasured in the tread groove next to thewear indicator bar – the official permissi-ble minimum tread depth has beenreached (in export countries this figuremay differ).

Renewing wwheels/tyresWheels and tyres are important designfeatures. The wheels and tyres approvedby us should be used. They are speciallymatched to the model concerned and con-tribute largely to the excellent roadhold-ing and safe driving characteristics.The TTechnical SServices hhold uup ttodate iinformation rregarding tthe sstan-dard ttyres ffitted bby tthe mmanufacturer.Also: MMany TTechnical SServices ppos-sess aa llarge rrange oof ttyres aand rrims.

• Fitting and repairing tyres requiresexpert knowledge and special tools. Thiswork may only be carried out by specialistpersonnel.

❀Because oof tthe pproblem oofdisposing oof tthe oold ttyres, tthe

special ttools nnecessary aand tthespecialist kknowledge rrequired, ttyrechanging sshould ppreferably bbe ddoneby aa TTechnical SService CCentre.

• For safety reasons the tyres should berenewed in pairs and not singly. The tyreswith the deepest tread should always beon the front wheels.

B1H-085

• You should only combine radial tyres ofthe same construction, size (rolling cir-cumference) and, as far as possible, thesame tread profile on all four wheels.

• If the spare wheel differs from the ver-sion fitted on the vehicle (i.e. winter orwide tyres) the spare tyre may only beused briefly and with an appropriatelycareful style of driving. It must bereplaced with the normal wheel as soonas possible.

• Never fit used tyres where their previ-ous history is not known.

• Knowing the tyre lettering and its mean-ing makes the selection of the correcttyres easier. Radial ply tyres have the fol-lowing lettering on the sidewall:

The mmanufacturing ddate is also to beseen on the tyre wall (possibly only oninner side of wheel):DOT ... 183 ... means that the tyre wasproduced in the 18th calendar week of2003.

WarningTyres wwhich aare mmore tthan 66 yyearsold sshould oonly bbe uused iin aanemergency aand tthen wwith aa ppartic-ularly ccareful sstyle oof ddriving.

If yyou wwish tto ffit yyour ccar wwith nnon-standard wwheels oor ttyres pplease nnote:

Warning

• For ttechnical rreasons iit iis nnotnormally ppossible tto uuse wwheelsfrom oother vvehicles –– iin ccertain ccir-cumstances nnot eeven wwheels ffromthe ssame vvehicle mmodel!

• Using ttypes oof wwheel aand/ortyres wwhich hhave nnot bbeenapproved bby uus ffor yyour vvehiclemodel ccan bbe ddetrimental tto tthesafety oof tthe vvehicle. IIt ccan aalsoaffect tthe vvehicle uunder ttheConstruction aand UUse rregulations.

WarningPlease ttake nnotice oof tthe wwarningnotes oon tthe nnext ppage.


3.62 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN

e.g. 195 // 665 RR 115 991 TT

195 = Tyre width in mm65 = Height/width ratio in %R = Radial construction code

letter = Radial15 = Wheel diameter in inches91 = Carrying capability codeT = Speed code letter


IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.63

• Wheels aand wwheel bbolts aarematched tto eeach oother.Therefore, wwhenever wwheels aarechanged tto aa ddifferent vversion(e.g. aalloy wwheels oor wwheels wwithwinter ttyres), tthe ccorrespondingwheel bbolts wwith tthe ccorrespond-ing llength aand ttaper, mmust aalso bbeused. TThe ssecurity oof tthe wwheelsand tthe ffunctioning oof tthe bbrakesystem ddepend oon tthis!

• If wwheel ttrim ddiscs aare ssubse-quently iinstalled iit iis eessential ttoensure tthat tthe aair fflow rremainsadequate tto ccool tthe bbrakes.

Technical Service Centres have all thenecessary information about the possibleconversion of wheels, tyres and wheeltrims.

Wheel bboltsThe wwheel bbolts mmust bbe cclean aandeasy tto tturn –– ddo nnot ggrease oor ooilunder aany ccircumstances!This aapplies nnot oonly tto cchanging aadefective wwheel bbut aalso wwhen rre-placing ssummer ttyres wwith wwintertyres aand vvice-versa.

Changing tthe wwheels rroundIf the front tyres are worn more than therear it is advisable to change the wheelsround as shown. All tyres will then haveapproximately the same length of servicelife.With certain types of tread wear it can bean advantage to change the wheels diag-onally.

Winter ttyres

WarningIn wwinter cconditions, wwinter ttyreswill ssignificantly iimprove hhandlingof tthe vvehicle. Because oof ttheir mmake uup ((width,rubber mmixture, ttread fformationetc.), ssummer ttyres pprovide llesstraction oon iice aand ssnow.

TO0-001

When fitting winter tyres note the follow-ing:

• For better driving performance, fit win-ter tyres on all four wheels.

• Winter tyres are no longer fully effectivewhen the tread has worn down to a depthof 4 mm.The following speed limits are valid forwinter tyres:Code letter Q max. 160 km/hCode letter T max. 190 km/hCode letter H max. 210 km/h

WarningThe hhighest ppermissible sspeed fforyour wwinter ttyres mmust nnot bbeexceeded. TThis ccould ddamage tthewheel aand llead tto aa sserious aacci-dent.

For tthis rreason, iin ssome ccountries,vehicles wwhich ccan eexceed tthis sspeedmust hhave aan aappropriate ssticker iinthe ddriver’s ffield oof vview. TThese aareavailable ffrom TTechnical SServiceCentres.Please note regulations to this effect inyour country.

• All-weather tyres can also be usedinstead of winter tyres.

• If you have a flat tyre the remarks onusing the spare wheel on page 3.58should be noted.

• Do not leave winter tyres fitted for anunnecessary long period because whenthe roads are free of snow and ice thehandling with summer tyres is better.

❀For eenvironmental rreasons ssum-mer ttyres sshould bbe ffitted aagain

as ssoon aas ppossible bbecause nnor-mally tthey aare qquieter iin rrunning, ttyrewear iis rreduced aand tthe ffuel ccon-sumption iis llower.

Snow cchainsSnow chains may only be fitted on thefront wheels.The use of snow chains on the tyres195/65 R 15 or 175/80 R 14 is allowed.Only uuse tthin cchains wwhich ddo nnotstand cclear mmore tthan 115 mmm ((includ-ing ttensioner).When using snow chains wheel trimplates and trim rings must be taken off. Inthis case, the wheel bolts must then befitted with caps to protect them.When driving over roads which are free ofsnow you must remove the chains. Onsuch roads they are detrimental to vehiclehandling, damage the tyres and wear outquickly.In some countries the maximum permissi-ble speed with snow chains is 50 km/h.


3.64 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN


IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.65

Warning

• In ccase oof aa fflat ttyre oor ppuncture,park tthe vvehicle aas ffar aas ppossibleaway ffrom tthe ttraffic fflow. IIf nnec-essary, sswitch hhazard wwarninglights oon aand pplace tthe wwarningtriangle iin pposition –– nnote aanystatutory rrequirements.

• All vvehicle ooccupants sshould lleavethe vvehicle aand mmove tto aa ssafearea ((e.g. bbehind ssafety bbarrier).

• Apply hhandbrake ffirmly, eengage aagear oor pplace tthe ggear sselector iinposition ““P” aand cchock the ooppositewheel wwith aa sstone oor ssimilar.

• When ttowing aa ttrailer, tthe ttrailermust ffirst bbe ddisengaged ffrom tthetowing vvehicle bbefore tthe wwheel iischanged.

• Carry oout wwheel cchange oon aas fflat aasurface aas ppossible.

• Take tools and spare wheel out of lug-gage compartment.

– Remove centre ccover with the wheelspanner and the wire hook*. Put thewire hook in one of the recesses of thewheel trim. Pass wheel spanner throughhook and lever trim off – see illustra-tion.

Changing wwheels

TO8-042

• Push the wheel spanner as far as possi-ble onto the wheel bolt as shown and turnthe spanner anti-clockwise. When doingthis, grip the spanner as far as possibletowards the lever end.If the bolts cannot be loosened, one canin an emergency, carefully push the span-ner down with a foot on the end of thelever. One should ensure that one has afirm stance and a good grip on the vehi-cle.Loosen wheel bolts about one turn.


3.66 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN

B45-082C


IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.67

• Depressions under vehicle for jack:

WarningIf tthe jjack iis nnot ffitted aat tthepoints mmarked oor ddescribed, ddam-age ccould bbe ccaused tto tthe vvehi-cle. TThere iis aalso aa rrisk oof iinjury!

– Depressions in the side member at frontand rear indicate the points at which thejack must be fitted – see arrows in illus-tration.

– These marks are about 15 cm and 25 cmfrom the front and rear wheel arch,respectively.

• Place jack under vehicle:The illustration shows the jack fitted onthe rear left hand side.

WarningIf tthe gground uunder tthe jjack iis ttoosoft, tthe vvehicle ccould sslip ooff tthejack.Ensure, ttherefore, tthat tthe jjack iison aa ssolid ssurface. IIf nnecessary,use aa llarge, sstable uunderlay ttoplace uunder tthe jjack.If tthe gground uunder tthe jjack iis sslip-pery, pplace aa nnon-slip rrubber mmatunderneath.

TO8-043 B45-084C

3.68 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN


– Wind jack arm up by turning the crank inthe spindle until the jack just goesunder the vehicle.

– The claw of the jack must fit round thevertical rib on the side member so thatthe jack cannot slip when vehicle islifted – see illustration on the page3.67.

– Align jack and at same time wind clawup further until it contacts the verticalrib on side member.

• Lift vehicle until the wheel is just clearof the ground.

• Remove wheel bolts (after lloosening),using box spanner in screwdriver handle(see illustration), place them on a cleansurface (hub cap, cloth, paper) next to thejack and remove wheel.

• Fit spare wheel, and slightly tighten allbolts using the box spanner in the screw-driver handle.The wwheel bbolts must bbe cclean aandeasy tto tturn –– ddo nnot ggrease oor ooilunder aany ccircumstances!

• Lower vehicle and fully tighten bolts indiagonal sequence using wheel spanner.

• Fit the wheel trim again.When fitting the wheel trim, you must firstpress on the trim at the valve cut-out andthen press on around the full circumfer-ence.

• Place defective wheel in spare wheelbracket and secure using handwheel.

• Feed the securing strap through theholes and use it to secure the polystyreneretainer for the vehicle tools.

B45-085C


IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.69

Notes

• The box spanner in the screwdriver han-dle makes handling the wheel bolts eas-ier. The blade should be removed whendoing this.Never uuse tthe bbox sspanner iin tthe hhan-dle oof tthe sscrewdriver tto lloosen oortighten wwheel bbolts.

• The ffollowing ppoints sshould bbenoted aafter cchanging aa wwheel:– Check tthe iinflation ppressure oof tthe

replacement wwheel aas ssoon aas ppos-sible.

– Have tthe ttightening ttorque oof tthewheel bbolts cchecked wwith aa ttorquewrench aas qquickly aas ppossible. TThetorque ffor ssteel aand aalloy wwheelsand ffor tthe sspare wwheel iis 1120 NNm.

If tthe wwheel bbolts aare sseen tto bbe ccor-roded oor ttoo ttight wwhen cchanging tthewheel, tthey mmust bbe rreplaced bbeforechecking tthe ttorque.Until tthis hhas bbeen ddone, yyou sshouldonly ddrive aat llow sspeeds.

• The defective wheel should be repairedas soon as possible.

WarningIf tthe vvehicle iis tto bbe ssubsequentlyfitted wwith wwheels oor ttires ddifferingfrom tthose ffitted bby tthe ffactory, iitis eessential tto aalways nnote tthe ccor-responding iindications iin tthe"Accessories, mmodifications aandreplacement oof pparts" cchapter.

Notes ffor ttyres wwhere tthe ddirectionof rrotation iis sstipulatedIt is imperative that the designated direc-tion of rotation for the tyre treads (whichcan be determined from the arrow on theside of the tyre) be kept to. The best tyreperformance i.e. in aquaplaning, roadadhesion, noise and wear are then guar-anteed.If a spare wheel has to be fitted againstthe stipulated direction of rotation, thismeasure should only be a temporary one.The best possible tyre performance con-cerning aquaplaning, noise level andwear are no longer fully guaranteed. We recommend that you take this intoaccount, especially in wet weather, andadjust your speed to the driving condi-tions.In order to use the principle of the direc-tion of rotation fully again, the faulty tyremust be replaced as soon as possible.If necessary, mount the tyre fitted againstthe direction of rotation in the stipulateddirection.

Anti-theft* wwheel bbolts1 – Anti-theft wheel bolt2 – Adapter for the wheel bolts(The adapter is stored with the on boardtools.)

Loosen oor ttighten wwheel bbolts

• First, place adapter 2 as far as possibleonto the anti-theft wheel 1 bolt.

• Place the wheel spanner (from the onboard tools) as far as possible overadapter 2 and loosen or tighten the wheelbolt.

• After the wheel has been changed theadapter needs to be removed from thewheel bolt.We recommend that you carry the adapterfor the wheel bolts in the vehicle and stowit at a location well known to the owner,preferably with the on board tools.

CodeThe code for the wheel bolt is engraved inthe front of the adapter.Make aa nnote oof tthe ccode aand kkeep iitin aa ssafe pplace. OOnly wwith tthis ccodecan aa rreplacement aadapter bbe oobtainedat aa SSEAT OOfficial SService CCenter.

3.70 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN


B45-329C

IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.71


The individual current circuits are pro-tected by fuses.It is advisable to always carry a few sparefuses on the vehicle.

Notes

WarningNever, uunder aany ccircumstances“repair” tthe ffuses oor rreplace tthemwith mmore ppowerful oones, aas ddam-age iin aanother ppart oof tthe eelectri-cal ssystem ccould ooccur. TThis ccouldeven llead tto aa ffire.

• If the newly inserted fuse blows againafter a short time, the electrical systemmust be checked by a Technical ServiceCentre as soon as possible.

• Some of the components listed are onlyfound on certain models or are optionalextras.

Changing aa ffuseThe fuses are located on the left handside of the dash panel behind a cover.On right-hand drive versions, the fusesare on the right hand side of the dashpanel behind a cover.

• Switch off the ignition and the compo-nent concerned.

• Take the cover off.To do this, place the flat blade of thescrewdriver in the recess on the cover(arrow) and lever off.

• With the aid of the list of fuses (see nextpages or the cover of the fuse box) deter-mine which fuse belongs to the compo-nent that has failed.

• Remove the appropriate fuse.

• Replace blown fuse – can be recog-nised by the burnt metal strip – with afuse of same amperage.

• Replace the cover.

Fuses

TO8-043A

Layout oof ffusesNo. Component A1)

1– Heated washer jets, heated mirrors......................... 10

2– Indicators ............................... 103– Lights ..................................... 54– Number plate lighting ............. 55– Comfort on and off .................. 7.56– Central locking ........................ 57– Reverse lights ......................... 108– Telephone............................... 59– ABS ........................................ 5

10– Petrol engine control unit ........ 1011– Instrument panel..................... 512– Supply current, diagnosis,

telephone ............................... 7.513– Brake lights ............................ 1014– Interior lighting, central locking/

electric windows...................... 10Interior light ............................ 5

15– Instrument panel, automatic gear box.................. 5

16– Magnetic clutch, electricwater pump ............................. 10

17– Free ........................................ 7.518– Main beam, right ..................... 1019– Main beam, left ....................... 1020– Dipped beam, right ................. 1021– Dipped beam, left.................... 1022– Side light, right ....................... 5

1) Amperes.

No. Component A1)

23– Side light, left ......................... 524– Windscreen washer system,

pump ...................................... 2025– Heating, air conditioning ......... 2526– Heated rear window................. 2027– Rear window wiper .................. 1028– Fuel pump ............................... 1529– Engine control, petrol engine ... 1030– Sliding roof ............................. 2031– Automatic gear box.................. 2032– Injectors: petrol ....................... 10

Engine control, diesel .............. 1533– Headlight washers................... 2034– Engine control, diesel engine... 10

Engine control, petrol engine ... 1035– Trailer device connection layout... 3036– Fog lights, rear fog light .......... 537– Contact ................................... 1038– Boot light, Central locking/

electric windows...................... 1039– Hazard warning lights.............. 1540– Horn........................................ 2041– Lighter .................................... 1542– Radio ...................................... 1543– Engine control, petrol engine ... 10

Engine control, diesel engine .. 1044– Heated seat ............................ 15

3.72 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN


IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.73


Fuse bbox iin tthe eengine compartment oon tthe bbatteryFuses A1)

Radiator fan, 1st level ........................30ABS engine relay................................30ABS main relay ..................................30

Metal ffuses2)

Alternator ........................................150On board network ............................110Radiator fan, 2nd level .......................40Engine distribution system.................50Glow plugs ........................................50

1) Amperes.2) These fuses should only be changed at a

Technical Service Centre.

Fuse ccolour ccode:Beige: 5 AmpBrown: 7.5 AmpRed: 10 AmpBlue: 15 AmpYellow: 20 AmpWhite 25 AmpGreen: 30 Amp

Automatic ffuseAll electric windows are protected as asingle set via an automatic fuse whichbreaks the circuit when overloaded (e.g.windows frozen) and completes the circuitagain after a few seconds.

B1J-092D

Before starting to replace a bulb, youmust first always switch off the consumerconcerned.Do not touch the glass part of the newbulb with bare fingers because the fingermarks left on the glass evaporate whenthe bulb becomes hot, the vapour settleson the reflector and dims it.Always use the same type of bulb. Thedesignation is marked on the base of thebulb or on the glass.It is advisable to always a carry a box ofspare bulbs in the vehicle. It should con-tain at least the following bulbs which areessential for traffic safety.

Rear llight bbulbsFog light ..................................12V/21WIndicator ..................................12V/21WRear low beam/Brake light .................12V/5 W 12V/21WNumber plate light .....................12V/5WReverse light ............................12V/21W

Main bbeam bbulb wwithout ffog llightDipped beam ....................12V/55W (H7)Main beam .......................12V/55W (H1)Indicator ..................................12V/21WSide light ...................................12V/5W

Main bbeam bbulb wwith ffog llightDipped beam ....................12V/55W (H7)Fog light ...........................12V/55W (H3)Main beam .......................12V/55W (H1)Indicator ..................................12V/21WSide light ...................................12V/5W

WarningH7 bbulbs aare ppressured aand ccanexplode wwhile bbeing cchanged.For tthis rreason yyou sshould aalwayswear ggloves aand pprotective gglasseswhen cchanging aan HH7 bbulb.

NoteAs a result of the special construction ofthe engine and the subsequent spacerequirements, the following bulbs are dif-ficult to replace.

Main bbeam

Side llight

Fog llight*

Front iindicatorsFor this reason these bulbs should alwaysbe changed at a Technical Service Centre.Notwithstanding, here follow instructionson how to change them, except for the foglights*.

3.74 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN


Changing bbulbs

IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.75


WarningWhen ddoing wwork iin tthe eenginecompartment yyou mmust ttake ggreatcare –– ddanger oof iinjury!For yyour oown ssafety nnote tthe rrele-vant wwarnings iin tthe ""Engine bbon-net" aand ""Engine ccompartment"chapters/sections.

On some models, before changing themain beam and front indicator bulbs, bearin mind the following:Remove the air aspiration tube and,depending on the engine, disconnect thebattery1).

1) Note safety warnings in the "Battery" chapter.

Main bbeam bbulbsThe illustration shows the left headlightfrom the rear.A – Dipped beam bulbB – Main beam bulbC – Side light bulbD – Indicator bulb

TO8-045TO8-044A

A –– DDipped bbeam bbulb

• Open bonnet.

• Remove cover, loosening screws 1..

• Unhook spring clips 2 in direction ofarrow and fold away.

• Pull out the plug of the bulb cable.

• Release the retaining spring and pull itaway.

• Take bulb out and insert new bulb sothat the locating lug on the bulb plateengages the recess in the reflector.

• Fold spring clip over the bulb plate untilthe clip engages.

• Connect plug.

• Place cover into guide.

• Have the headlight beam alignmentchecked.

B –– MMain bbeam bbulb

• Open bonnet.

• Remove cover loosening screws 1.


• Pull out the plug of the bulb cable.

• Release the retaining spring and pull itaway.

• Take bulb out and insert new bulb sothat the locating lug on the bulb plateengages the recess in the reflector.

• Fold spring clip over the bulb plate untilthe clip engages.

• Connect plug.

• Place cover into guide.

• Have the headlight beam alignmentchecked.

3.76 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN


TO8-044BTO8-046

IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.77


C –– SSide llight bbulbs

• Open the bonnet.

• Remove the cover, loosening screws 1.


• Remove bulb holder from the reflector.

• Take bulb out.

• Fit the new bulb.

• Insert bulb carrier into reflector.

• Replace plastic cover.

D –– IIndicator bbulb

• Open the bonnet.

• Remove the cover, loosening screws 1.


• Disconnect the connector, pressing thespring tab.

• Turn holder to right and remove it fromits housing.

• Turn the bulb to the left and replace it.

• To re-assemble do the same steps inthe reverse order.

• Plug in the connector

• Replace the plastic cover.

TO8-044DTO8-044C

Side iindicators

• Press the indicator to the left or to theright and remove the bulb.

• Pull out bulb holder.

• Pull out the defective glass bulb andinsert new one.

• Slide bulb holder into the indicatorguides until the holder engages.

• First place the indicator with retaininglugs (arrow 1) in body opening and thenengage the light in the direction of thearrow (arrow 2).

Door llights

• Remove complete light carrier. To dothis, insert the flat blade of the screw-driver between the light and the roof trim(arrow) and carefully lever the light carrierout until it is possible to pull it out to therear from the trim.

• Pull out defective bulb and insert newone.

• Press the bulb carrier in at the front firstand then press the bulb opening in theroof trim.

3.78 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN


B1J-084DB11-080D

IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.79


Rear llightsTailgate llightsFog llightReverse llight

• Open tailgate.

• Remove plastic cover A.

• Press spring retainers in the direction ofthe arrows.

• Remove the bulb holder.

• Push on the bulb and turn it to the left.

• Remove the bulb and replace it.

• Replace the lamp holder.

• Replace the plastic cover A.

Body wwork llightsRear llightBrake llightIndicator llight

• Open tailgate.

• Remove plastic cover B.

• Remove the bulb holder, pressing theside retainers.

• Push on the bulb and turn it to the left.

• Remove the bulb and replace it.

• Replace the lamp holder, pressing theside retainers.

• Replace the plastic cover B.

TO8-048TO8-047

Number pplate llight

• Unscrew lens and lever it off with greatcare to avoid breakage.

• Pull defective bulb out of holder andinsert the new bulb.

• Insert lens in the tailgate opening,ensure that the rubber seal and the lightare correctly positioned (see adjacentlight).

• Do not overtighten the lens screws.

Interior llights aand ffront rreadinglights ((three pparts)

• Remove the lens. To do this insert a finescrewdriver into the gap between thehousing and lens (arrow) and lever thelens off carefully, to avoid damage.

• Pull out the defective bulb and insert anew one.

• First attach lens to switch trim with bothretaining lugs. Then push up at front untilboth locking plugs engage.

3.80 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN


B45-145CTO8-048A

IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.81


Rear iinterior llight*

• Remove complete bulb holder. To dothis, insert the flat blade of the screw-driver between the light and the roof trim(arrow) and carefully lever the bulb holderout.

• Move plastic cover in the direction ofthe arrow and remove.

• Pull out defective bulb and insert newone.

• Slide bulb cover to the side until itengages.

• First insert light carrier from the con-nector side and then press into the open-ing of the roof trim.

B1J-087DB45-147C

Additional bbrake llight*Because of the difficulty of the operation,this bulb should only be changed by aTechnical Service Centre.

Glove ccompartment llight*

• Insert the screwdriver at the topbetween the light and the glove compart-ment and carefully lever the light out.Then take the light out at an angle.

• Change the bulb.

• Insert the light with the switch side atthe bottom first and then at the top until itengages.

Luggage ccompartment llightThe luggage compartment light is locatedin the centre, under the tray.

• Lever out the light with the flat end of ascrewdriver, in the slot.

• Change the bulb.

• Refit the light from the switch side fromleft to right, pressing upwards.

3.82 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN


IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.83


If a radio is installed or if the factory-pro-vided radio is replaced, including speak-ers, the following must be noted:

• Connectors* fitted in the vehicle are forOriginal SEAT Radios1).

• Radios with different connectors mustbe connected with adaptor cables.

WarningNever ccut aa ccable aand nnever lleaveit wwithout iinsulation. IIf nnecessaryuse aan aadaptor.Otherwise tthe ccables ccould bbeoverloaded aand ccause aa sshort ccir-cuit –– ddanger oof ffire.

Furthermore, iimportant eelectroniccomponents ccould ddeteriorate oor bbedamaged. IIn ccase oof aa ddisturbance iinthe sspeed ssignal, ffor eexample, iitcould ccause ffailure iin tthe eengine ccon-trol, aautomatic ggearbox, AABS, eetc.Even iif tthe sspeed ssignal iis cconnectedto aa rradio ffitted wwith aan aautomaticvolume aadjustment bby aa ddifferentmanufacturer, aa ffailure oof tthe pprevi-ously mmentioned kkind ccould ooccur.To access the original speakers you mustremove the entire door panel. Since thisoperation requires special tools andexpertise, we recommend that this beundertaken by a Technical Service Centre.

• The radio and loudspeakers shouldtherefore be fitted by a Technical ServiceCentre, who are perfectly conversant withall the technical specificities of the vehi-cles, and have Original Radios1) and allthe necessary spares from the SEATOriginal Parts Program1). Moreover, allwork is carried out according to factorystandards.

• The radios from the SEAT OriginalAccessories program1) correspond to fac-tory models and guarantee a trouble-freeinstallation. These radios are fitted withadvanced technology and are easy-to-use.

• It is also advisable to use speakers,assembly kits, antennas and anti-parasitekits from the Original Accessories pro-gram1). These parts have been created foreach type of vehicle.

Roof aantenna*The vehicle may be fitted with an extend-able anti-theft roof antenna* which canbe folded backwards, i.e. at a car wash.

To ffoldUnscrew rod, bend backwards to the hori-zontal position and screw in.

To uuseProceed in reverse.

1) Not for all countries.

Installing aa rradio

The installation of mobile telephonesshould be carried out by a TechnicalService Centre.SEAT has authorised the use of mobiletelephones and two-way radios for yourvehicle with correctly installed externalaerial and maximum broadcast power of10 Watts.

NotesWhen uusing mmobile ttelephones oor ttwo-way, ffaults iin tthe vvehicle eelectricscould ooccur uunder tthe ffollowing ccon-ditions:– no eexternal aaerial– external aaerial iincorrectly iinstalled– broadcast ppower hhigher tthan 110

Watts.Mobile ttelephones oor ttwo-way rradiosmust nnot, ttherefore, bbe ooperatedinside tthe vvehicle wwithout aa sseparateexternal aaerial oor wwith aan aaerial wwhichhas bbeen iincorrectly iinstalled.

WarningMobile ttelephones aand ttwo-wayradios ooperated iinside tthe vvehiclewithout aa sseparate eexternal aaerialor wwith aan iincorrectly iinstalledexternal aaerial ccan bbe hharmful ttohealth ddue tto tthe eextremely hhighelectromagnetic ffields ggenerated.

Furthermore, optimal range is onlyachieved with an external aerial.

NotePlease ttake iinto aaccount tthe iinforma-tion iin tthe iinstruction mmanuals ppro-vided aalong wwith mmobile ttelephonesand rradiotelephones!If you want to use a mobile telephone ortwo-way radio with a broadcast power ofhigher than 10 Watt, please ask aTechnical Service Centre. They are awareof the technical possibilities for retro-fit-ting mobile telephones and two-wayradios.

WarningPlease cconcentrate oon yyour ddrivingfirst oof aall. NNever iinstall ttelephoneretainers oon tthe AAir BBag ccover oorwithin iits rrange oof eeffectiveness.This wwould iincrease tthe rrisk oofinjury sshould tthe AAir BBag bbe aacti-vated dduring aan aaccident.

3.84 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN


Mobile ttelephones aand rradio ttelephones

IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.85


If the engine will not start because thebattery is flat, jump lleads can be con-nected to the battery of another vehicle tostart the engine. The following pointsshould be noted:

• Both batteries must be of the 12 Voltvariety and the capacity (Ah) of thebooster battery must be approximatelythe same as that of the flat battery.

• The jumper cables must be heavyenough to carry the load. Note cable man-ufacturer’s data.

• Only use jumper cables with insulatedclips.

WarningA fflat bbattery ccan ffreeze aat ttemper-atures oof lless tthan 00°C. AA fflat bbat-tery mmust ffirst bbe tthawed ooutbefore aattaching tthe jjump lleads,as iit ccould ootherwise eexplode.

• There must be no contact between thevehicles, otherwise current can flow assoon as the plus terminals are connected.

• The flat battery must be properly con-nected to the electrical system.

• The engine of the boosting vehicle mustbe running.

• Ensure that the insulated clips haveenough contact to metal. This is particu-larly applicable to clips which areattached to the engine block.

Colors oof jjumper ccables:Positive cable: generally red.Negative cable: generally black, brown orblue.Please nnote iinstructions oon tthe ffol-lowing ppage.

Emergency sstarting

3.86 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––IF AND WHEN


A – Flat batteryB – Boosting batteryThe battery is in the engine compartmenton the left looking forward.The eemergency sstarting ccable mmustbe aattached iin tthe ffollowing oorder:Before the starting cable can be con-nected to the (+) terminal on the batteryof the vehicle, the cover of the fuse holdermust first be opened (see page 3.49).1. One end of (+) cable (usually red) tothe (+) terminal of the flat battery A.2. Other end of the red cable to the (+)terminal of boosting battery B.3. One end of (–) cable (usually black) tothe (–) terminal of boosting battery B.4. Other end of black cable (X) to a solidmetal part bolted to the block or to cylin-der block itself.Do not connect the cable to the flat bat-tery minus terminal. The sparks couldignite the explosive gas flowing out of thebattery.

Warning

• The nnon-insulated pparts oof tthecable cclips mmust nnot ttouch ooneanother oon aany aaccount. FFurther-more tthe jjumper ccable aattached ttothe bbattery ppositive tterminal mmustnot ccome iinto ccontact wwith eelectri-cally cconductive vvehicle pparts ––danger oof sshort ccircuit!

• Route tthe jjumper ccables sso tthatthey ccannot ccome iinto ccontactwith rrotating pparts iin tthe eenginecompartment.

• Do nnot sstand wwith yyour fface ooverthe bbattery –– ddanger oof aacid bburns!

• Keep ssources oof iignition ((nakedflames, bburning ccigarettes eetc.)well aaway ffrom tthe bbattery –– ddan-ger oof eexplosion!

• Start the engine as described in the“Starting engine” section.

• If the engine does not start at once,stop using starter after 10 seconds, waitabout half a minute and then try again.

• With eengine rrunning, ddisconnectcables iin rreverse ssequence tto ttheconnection.

B1H-236C

IF AND WHEN–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––3.87


General nnotes

• Check whether there are any local trafficregulations concerning the towing of vehi-cles.

• The tow-rope should be slightly elasticto reduce the risk of damage to both vehi-cles. It is advisable to use synthetic fibreropes, or ropes of similar elastic material.It is however safer to use a towing bar!Avoid excessive towing effort and do notjerk. During towing operations on otherthan surfaced roads there is always thedanger that the attachment points will beoverloaded and damaged.

• Before ttrying tto ttow sstart, aan aattemptshould bbe mmade tto sstart uusing tthebattery oof aanother vvehicle –– ssee pprevi-ous ppage.

• When using a tow-rope the driver of thetowing vehicle must engage the clutchvery gently when moving off and changinggear.

• The driver of the vehicle being towedmust ensure that the tow-rope is alwaystaut.

• The emergency lights must be switchedon in both vehicles – unless local regula-tions differ.

• Turn ignition on so that the steeringwheel is free and the turn signals, horn,and, if necessary, the windscreen wiperand washer can be used.

• As the brake servo only works when theengine is running, considerably morepressure is required on the brake pedalwhen the engine is not running.

• More force than usual will be requiredto turn the steering wheel as the powerassisted steering does not work whenengine is not running.

• When there is no lubricant in the man-ual or automatic gearbox, the vehicle mayonly be towed with driving wheels lifted.A tow-rope or a towing bar must only beapplied at the following points:

Tow sstart/towing

3.88 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN


Front ttowing eeyeTo be able to tow the vehicle, the right-hand cover in the lower part of the frontbumper must be removed first.To rremove tthe ccover insert the flat partof a screwdriver, as in the illustration,carefully lever off and remove the cover.

Screw in the towing eye which is locatedin the vehicle’s tool box. Turn the eye tothe lleft with the wheel spanner until theeye is perfectly screwed in.To remove the towing eye, turn it to theright with the wheel spanner. Place it inits housing, inside the vehicle’s tool box.To pplace tthe ccover put it in its housingand engage it by hitting it lightly with yourhand.

NoteThe towing eye needs to be carried in thevehicle at all times.

LEO-037

IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.89


Rear ttowing eeyeThe towing eye is located on the rightunder the rear bumper.

Remove tthe ccoverTo remove the cover insert the flat part ofa screwdriver in the existing groovebetween the cover and the bumper andcarefully lever off.

Place tthe ccoverTo place the cover position the tabstowards their housings and gently bangthe cover into place with your hand.

IB9-051

Tow sstartingIt iis nnot aadvisable tto ttow sstart aa vvehi-cle. WWe rrecommend tthe uuse oofanother vvehicle’s bbattery. CConsult tthe"Emergency sstarting" cchapter.There are various reasons why a vehicleshould nnot bbe tow started:

• When towing there is a danger of collid-ing with the towed vehicle.

• In vvehicles wwith aa ppetrol eengine,fuel mmay aaccumulate iin tthe ccata-lysts1) and ccause ddamage.The ffollowing ppoints mmust bbe nnotedby tthe ddriver oof tthe mmanual ggear vvehi-cle bbeing ttow sstarted:

• Before moving off, engage 2nd or 3rdgear, depress and hold clutch.

• Switch ignition on.

• Once both vehicles are moving, releasethe clutch.

• As soon as engine starts, depressclutch and move gear lever into neutral toavoid running into the towing vehicle.

• For ttechnical rreasons ttow sstarting aavehicle wwith aan aautomatic ggear bbox iisnot ppossible.

1) Does not apply to vehicles with Diesel engine.

TowingWhen ttowing vehicles with an auto-matic ggearbox, the following points mustbe noted in addition to the details on theprevious page:

• Selector lever at “N”.

• Do not have the vehicle towed fasterthan 30 mph (50 km/h).

• Do not tow further than 30 miles(50 kilometres).If the vehicle has to be towed long dis-tances it must be lifted at the front.Reason: When the engine is not running,the gearbox oil pump is not working andthe gearbox is not adequately lubricatedfor high speeds or long distances.

• With a breakdown vehicle the vehiclemay only be suspended at the front.Reason: If given a rear suspended tow,the drive shafts turn backwards. The plan-etary gears in the automatic gearbox thenturn at such high speeds that the gearboxwill be severely damaged in a short time.

3.90 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN


Trolley jjackTo prevent damage to the underside ofthe vehicle it is essential to use a ssuitablerubber ppad.On nno aaccount sshould tthe vvehicle bbelifted uunder tthe eengine, ggearbox, rrearaxle oor ffront aaxle aas tthis ccan ccauseserious ddamage.

Warning

• With tthe vvehicle llifted nneverstart tthe eengine –– ddanger oof aacci-dent!

• If tthe wwork hhas tto bbe ddone uunder-neath tthe vvehicle, tthe vvehiclemust bbe ssupported oon ssuitablestands.

Vehicle hhoistBefore ddriving oover tthe vvehicle llift,ensure tthat tthere iis aadequate cclear-ance bbetween llift ssuperstructure aandlow pparts oon uunderside oof vvehicle.

NoteIn vvehicles ffitted wwith aa pplastic hheel-rest aand ccover wwe rrecommend tthatyou uuse aadditional rrubber ddisks wwitha tthickness oof 225 oor 330 mmm tto aavoiddamage tto tthe hheelrest.

Lifting ppoints ffor wworkshop hhoistand ttrolley jjackThe vehicle may only be lifted at thepoints shown in the illustration:

Front On the vertical side member reinforce-ment in the area of the marking for thevehicle jack.

Lifting tthe vvehicle

B45-104C

IF AND WHEN ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3.91


Rear On the vertical side member reinforce-ment in the area of the marking for thevehicle jack.

Vehicle jjackLifting with the vehicle jack is describedon page 3.67.

3.92 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– IF AND WHEN


B45-105C

GENERAL NOTES

General considerations on technical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2

WEIGHTS AND MEASUREMENTS

Fixing points for tow bar* . . . . . . . 4.4

VEHICLEIDENTIFICATION DATA

Vehicle identification data . . . . . . 4.5

ENGINE DATA

1.4 55 kW 16V Petrol engine . . . . 4.7

1.6 77 kW 16V Petrol engine . . . . 4.8

1.8 132 kW 20VT Petrol engine (6 gears) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9

1.9 66 kW TDI Diesel engine . . . 4.10



1.9 110 kW TDI Diesel engine (6 gears). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13

TECHNICAL DATA

Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14

Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14

TECHNICAL DATA ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 4.1

INDEX

Unless ootherwise iindicated, aall ttech-nical ddetails pprovided bbelow aapply ttovehicles wwith sstandard ffittings.These vvalues mmay bbe ddifferent ffor sspe-cial vvehicles oor vvehicles ddestined fforother ccountries.Please bbear iin mmind tthat tthe ddata iinthe ccar’s oofficial ddocuments ttakesprecedence.

Engine ddataThe eengine ffitted iin yyour vvehicle iisindicated iin tthe ddata ssheet iincludedin tthe IInspection aand MMaintenancePlan aand iin tthe ccar’s oofficial ddocu-ments.

PerformanceThese values were calculated withoutextra equipment reducing performance,such as air conditioning, mud flaps, extrawide tyres, etc.

Fuel CConsumptionThe consumption and emission levelswere calculated using the 93/116/CEmeasuring standards and take intoaccount the true free-standing weight ofthe vehicle (weight category). To measurethe fuel consumption the vehicle is testedin two different cycles on a rolling benchunder the following conditions:

• Town ddriving is measured from a coldstart of the engine. Then, driving condi-tions similar to those of in-town drivingare simulated.

• Intercity ddriving the car is acceleratedand braked in all gears, just as in normaldriving. The driving speed varies between0 and 120 km/h.

• Total cconsumption is based on a bal-anced average of 37% of town driving and63% of intercity driving.

• CO2 emission llevels are obtainedfrom the exhaust fumes of the vehiclestested in town and intercity driving on arolling belt. These fumes are thenanalysed and the CO2 emission levels areobtained, among other values.

Notes

• The consumption and emission levelsgiven in the following tables are correct forunloaded vehicles with basic fittings.If there are extra fittings, the empty weightwill increase and, as a result, the weightcategory, which may slightly increase theconsumption and CO2 levels. Consult aTechnical Service Centre to find out theexact specifications of your vehicle.

• Driving style, road and traffic condi-tions, weather conditions and the condi-tion of the vehicle will, in practice, pro-duce consumption levels different tothose indicated.

Weights

NoteThese weights are valid for EuropeanUnion vehicles. Vehicles for other coun-tries may have other weights. At all timesit should be taken into account that thedata given with the official vehicle docu-ment prevails.

4.2 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– GENERAL NOTES

TECHNICAL DATA

General cconsiderations oon ttechnical ddata

GENERAL NOTES –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 4.3

TECHNICAL DATA

Warning

• The mmaximum aauthorized lloadand tthe lload oon tthe aaxle mmustnever bbe eexceeded. SSee ttables oonthe ffollowing ppages.

• It mmust bbe rremembered tthatwhen ttransporting hheavy oobjects,the ccentre oof ggravity iis ddisplaced.For tthis rreason, sspeed aand ddrivingshould bbe aadjusted aaccordingly.

• When lloading lluggage aalwaysensure tthat nno lloose oobjects wwillfly ttowards tthe ffront oof tthe vvehiclein tthe eevent oof ssharp bbraking. IIfnecessary uuse tthe llashing rrings*provided.

Tyre ppressureThe pressure values given here are forcold tyres – do not reduce the high pres-sure of warm tyres.

WarningTyre ppressure iis oof ggreat iimpor-tance, pparticularly aat hhigh sspeeds,and sshould bbe cchecked aat lleastonce aa mmonth.

Tow lloads

Support lloadsThe maximum authorised load on theball bar of the ball joint of the towing sys-tem is 75 kg.The minimum support load must be 4% ofthe real tow load. However it need not bemore than 25 kg. You should use the fullauthorised load available to you.

NotesThese weights are valid for EuropeanUnion vehicles. Vehicles for other coun-tries may take other weights. At all timesit should be taken into account that thedata given with the official vehicle docu-ments prevails.

• For ssafety rreasons ddo nnot ddriveabove 880 kkm/h, nnot eeven iin ccountrieswhere ttravelling aat aa ggreater sspeed iispermitted.

• Due to special versions of certain mod-els and optional extras such as air condi-tioning, sliding/tilting roof, tow bar andother added features, the free standingweight increases, meaning that the loadsize is correspondingly reduced.

WarningDanger oof aaccident!We rrecommend tthat yyou vvisit aaTechnical SService CCentre ffor ttheretrofitting oof aa ttow hhook.

A = Attachment pointsB = 65 mmC = 420 mm (empty vehicle) /

350 mm (vehicle with max. load)D = 300 mmE = 512 mmF = 1118 mmG = 1014 mmAll measurements are expressed in mm.

NoteFor more details see "Trailer towing" chap-ter.

4.4 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– WEIGHTS AND MEASUREMENTS

TECHNICAL DATA

Fixing ppoints ffor ttow bbar*

TO8-030

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION DATA ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 4.5

TECHNICAL DATA

1 – Type plate.2 – Vehicle identification number.3 – Engine number.

Data-carrying aadhesivesticker is stuck on the inside rim of thespare wheel or on the floor of the boot.It carries the following information:1 – Production control bar code.2 – Vehicle identification number.3 – Vehicle model number.4 – Model/engine power.5 – Engine and gearbox lettering.6 – Paint code/inside finish numbers.7 – Optional extras code numbers.The vehicle data from numbers 2 to 7 arealso included in the maintenance andinspection plan.

Vehicle iidentification ddata

B1H-116CTO0-002

4.6 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION DATA

TECHNICAL DATA

Data-carrying aadhesiveA – BrandB – Countersign for the official approval

numberC – Chassis numberD – M.A.W.1)

E – M.A.W.1) of vehicle (loaded vehicle)F – M.A.W.1) on front axleG – M.A.W.1) on rear axleH – TypeI – Emissions coefficient

1) Maximum Authorized Weight

TOO-003

1.4 555 kkW 116V PPetrol eengine

1) Research-Oktan-Zahl: Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol.2) If the described fuel is not available then fuel conforming to the standard 91 ROZ1) lead free may be

used. For more information, see the chapter about fuel.3) Vehicles with basic equipment.4) Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).

ENGINE DATA ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 4.7

TECHNICAL DATA

Engine ddataOutput kW (HP) after 1/min 55 (75)/5000Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 126/3300Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1390Compression 10.5 ± 0.3Fuel 95 ROZ1) Super unleaded2)

PerformanceMaximum speed in km/h 170Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 9.7Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 14.8

Fuel cconsumption ((l/100 kkm) // CCO2 (g/km)Town driving 9.0/216 9.1/218Intercity driving 5.4/130 5.5/132Total 6.7/161 6.8/163

WeightsMaximum authorised weight in kg 1716Free standing weight in driving order3) in kg 1250(with driver)Authorised load on front axle in kg 835Authorised load on rear axle in kg 930Authorised load on roof in kg 754)

Tow wweightsTow without brake on slopes of up to 12% 600 KgTow with brake on slopes of up to 12% 1000 Kg

Engine ooil ccapacityEngine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.5 l.

4.8 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– ENGINE DATA

TECHNICAL DATA

1.6 777 kkW 116V PPetrol eengine

1) Research-Oktan-Zahl: Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol.2) If the described fuel is not available then fuel conforming to the Super 95 ROZ1) lead free may be used.

For more information, see the chapter about fuel.3) Vehicles with basic equipment.4) Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).

Engine ddataOutput kW (HP) after 1/min 77 (105)/5700Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 148/4500Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1598Compression 11.5 ± 0.3Fuel 98 ROZ1) Super unleaded2)






ENGINE DATA ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 4.9

TECHNICAL DATA

1.8 1132 kkW 220VT PPetrol eengine ((6 ggears)

1) Research-Oktan-Zahl: Measurement of the anti-explosive power of petrol.2) If the described fuel is not available then fuel conforming to the Super 95 ROZ1) lead free may be used.

For more information, see the chapter about fuel.3) Vehicles with basic equipment.4) Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).

Engine ddataOutput kW (HP) after 1/min 132 (180)/5500Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 235/1950-5000Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1781Compression 9.5 ± 0.5Fuel 98 ROZ1) Super unleaded2)

PerformanceMaximum speed in km/h 229Acceleration 0-80 km/h in seconds 6Acceleration 0-100 km/h in seconds 8


WeightsMaximum authorised weight in kg 1859Free standing weight in driving order3) in kg 1402/1463(with driver)Authorised load on front axle in kg 955Authorised load on rear axle in kg 930Authorised load on roof in kg 754)



4.10 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– ENGINE DATA

TECHNICAL DATA

1.9 666 kkW TTDI DDiesel eengine

1) Cetan-Zahl (Cetane Index) = Measurement of fuel combustion power.2) Vehicles with basic equipment.3) Maximum load on roof including roof rack (see "Roof rack" chapter).

Engine ddataOutput kW (HP) after 1/min 66 (90)/3750Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 210/1900Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1896Compression 19.5 ± 0.5Fuel Min 49 CZ1) or RME biodiesel


Fuel cconsumption ((l/100 kkm) CO2 (g/km)Town driving 6.8 184Intercity driving 4.3 116Total 5.2 140




ENGINE DATA ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 4.11

TECHNICAL DATA

1.9 881 kkW TTDI DDiesel eengine


Engine ddataOutput kW (HP) after 1/min 81 (110)/4150Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 235/1900Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1896Compression 19.5 ± 0.5Fuel Min 49 CZ1) or RME biodiesel






4.12 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––ENGINE DATA

TECHNICAL DATA

1.9 TTDI 996 kkW DDiesel eengine

Engine ddataOutput kW (HP) after 1/min 96 (130)/4000Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 310/1900Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1896Compression 19 ± 0.5Diesel fuel Min 49 CZ1) or RME


Fuel cconsumption ((l/100 kkm) CO2 (g/km)Town driving 7,0/189 7,1/192Intercity driving 4,3/116 4,5/122Total 5,2/140 5,4/146

WeightsMaximum authorised weight in kg 1845Free standing weight in driving order2) in kg 1398/1473(with driver)Authorised load on front axle in kg 980Authorised load on rear axle in kg 930Authorised load on roof in kg 753)




ENGINE DATA ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––4.13

TECHNICAL DATA


1.9 1110 kkW TTDI DDiesel eengine ((6 ggears)

Engine ddataOutput kW (HP) after 1/min 110 (150)/4000Maximum engine torque in Nm after 1/min 320/1900Number of cylinders/Cylinder capacity in cm3 4/1896Compression 18.0 ± 0.5Diesel fuel Min 49 CZ1) or RME






4.14 ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––TECHNICAL DATA

TECHNICAL DATA

Toledo

MeasurementsLength/Width 4439 mm, 1742 mmHeight at free standing weight 1436 mmFront and rear overhang 882 mm / 1044 mmWheel base 2513 mmTurning ratio 10.9 m

Front RearWheel gauge1) 1513 mm 1494 mm

1500 mm 1481 mm

CapacitiesFuel tank 55 l. Reserve of 7 l.Windscreen/Headlight washer tank 2.8 l./6.2 l.

Tyre ppressuresSummer ttyres:Tyre pressure is shown on the adhesive on the inside of the fuel cap.Winter ttyres:The pressure of these tyres is identical to summer tyres. Just add 0.2 bars.

1) This data may vary depending on the type of alloy.

AAccessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51

Adjustable steering column . . . . 2.63

Adjusting mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.77

– air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . 2.79

– blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78

– controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78

– temperature selector . . . . . . . 2.78

– ventilation (fresh air). . . . . . . 2.80

Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16/2.22

Alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31

Anti-dazzle interior mirror. . . . . . 2.54

Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20/3.8

Anti-skidding system of the drive wheels (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . 2.33

Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . 3.70

Aquaplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.61

Armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.71

Attach child seat . . . . . . . . 1.15/1.30

Attaching child seats with the ISOFIX system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31

Automatic car washes . . . . . . . . 3.27

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89

– notes on driving . . . . . . . . . . 2.92

– reversing lights . . . . . . . . . . . 2.91

BBalancing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45

– charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.47

– magic eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46

– renewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5

Boot light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7

CCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14

Care of paint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28

Care of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27

– alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31

– cleaning seat belts . . . . . . . . 3.30

Catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15

Cavity preservation. . . . . . . . . . . 3.33

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27

– locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28

– opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27

GENERAL INDEX –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––1

GENERAL INDEX

GENERAL INDEX

Central locking button . . . . . . . . 2.29

– automatic Locking . . . . . . . . . 2.29

– automatic Unlocking . . . . . . . 2.30

– unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30

Cetane Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5

Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74

Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . 3.40

Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.65

Changing wiper blades. . . . . . . . 2.53

Checking coolant level . . . . . . . . 3.42

Checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72

Cleaning and anti-corrosion treatment of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31

Cleaning the exhaust fumes . . . . 3.15

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.84

– air circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.86

– controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.85

– vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.84

Control of interior lights . . . . . . . 2.50

Coolant temperature. . . . . . . . . . . 2.6

Cooling system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41

– additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . 2.100

DData-carrying adhesive. . . . . . . . . 4.5

Defrosting windscreen and side windows . . . . . . 2.76/2.80/2.85

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7

Door, boot and window seals . . . 3.29

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26

Drink can holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23

Driving in the winter

– care of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27

– cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41

– defrosting windscreen and

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29

– diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5

– engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37

– snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64

– windscreen washer . . . . . . . . 3.50

– winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63

Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . 3.53

EEconomical driving . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16

Electric socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72

Electric windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39

– roll-back function . . . . . . . . . 2.41

Electrically adjustable mirrors . . 2.54

Electronic Differential Lock(EDL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20

Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . 2.25

2 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––GENERAL INDEX

GENERAL INDEX

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48/3.12

Emergency starting. . . . . . . . . . . 3.85

Engine bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . 3.35

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7-4.13

Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37

– specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37

Engine oil additives . . . . . . . . . . 3.40

❀ Environment

– battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49

– brake fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44

– care of the vehicle. . . . . . . . . 3.27

– driving and reducing exhaust fumes and noise . . . 3.16

– engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40

– environment-friendly driving. . 3.16

– fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4

– purification of exhaust fumes . 3.15

– tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60

– tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.61

– used oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40

– used tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.61

FFilling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2

Filter preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6

First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55

Fixing points for tow bar. . . . . . . . 4.4

Foot mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64

Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45

Front seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32/2.57

– driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57

– electrical adjustment. . . . . . . 2.59

– front passenger seat . . . . . . . 2.57

– lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . 2.58

– manual adjustment . . . . . . . . 2.58

Front towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.71

GGear layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89

Gear lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89

General considerations on technical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2

Glove box light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50

HHandbrake. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18/2.95

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . 2.47

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . 1.33/2.61

Headlight covering . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24

Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49

Headlight range control . . . . . . . 2.46

Headlight washer system . . . . . . 2.52

GENERAL INDEX –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––3

GENERAL INDEX

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . 2.46

Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.63

Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . 2.74

– air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75

– blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75

– controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75

– temperature selector . . . . . . . 2.75

– ventilation (fresh air). . . . . . . 2.76

– vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.74

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4

IIgnition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.96

Indicators and dipped beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49

Installing a radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.83

Instrument lighting. . . . . . . . . . . 2.46

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50

JJack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57/3.67/3.92

jumper cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.85

KKey tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23

Keys with remote control . . . . . . 2.24

Kick-down device . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.92

LLashing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.65

Lifting the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . 3.91

Lighting switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45

Locking locations of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27

Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . 2.64

MManual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89

– reversing lights . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89

Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14

Mileage clock/Trip mileage . . . . 2.11

Mirror heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.55

Mobile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.84

Multifunction indicator . . . . . . . . . 2.8

NNatural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30

OOctane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4

On board tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56

PParking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49

4 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––GENERAL INDEX

GENERAL INDEX

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4

– additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4

– quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13

RRadiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4

Radio-frequency remote controlkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36

– selective unlocking . . . . . . . . 2.37

– synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . 2.38

Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51

Reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50

Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45

Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.67

Rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.66

Rear towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.89

Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54

Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23

replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . 3.51

Reverse gear . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89/2.91

Revolutions counter . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5

Roof antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.83

Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.69

Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14

SSafety for children . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3

Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.91

Selector lever positions . . . . . . . 2.91

Service interval indicator . . . . . . 2.12

Servobrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8

Short or long beams. . . . . . . . . . 2.49

Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45

Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.64

Spare parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51

Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.58

Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 2.97

– after running out of fuel . . . . 2.98

– diesel engines. . . . . . . . . . . . 2.98

– petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.97

Stopping the engine. . . . . . . . . . 2.99

Stowage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72

Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45

Switches in the central console . 2.48

TTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32

– opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32

GENERAL INDEX –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––5

GENERAL INDEX

The first 1,500 km . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14

Thematic index. . . . . 1.1/2.1/3.1/4.1

Tool housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56

Tow start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.87

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20

– attachment points . . . . . . . . . 3.20

Trolley jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.91

Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49

Type plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5

Tyre life. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59

Tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59

– inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . 3.59

– running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59

– wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 3.61

– where the direction of rotation is stipulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59

UUndercoating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32

Unleaded petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4

Unlocking the tank flap . . . . 2.48/3.2

VVehicle hoist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.91

Vehicle identification data . . . . . . 4.5

Vehicle identification number. . . . 4.5

Vehicle wallet stowage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73

Volumetric sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35

WWarning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13

– Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22

– alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17

– anti-locking brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20

– brake wear monitor . . . . . . . . 2.19

– brakes/hand brake . . . . . . . . 2.18

– coolant temperature/ level . . 2.15

– diagnosis/excess of pollution 2.19

– drive wheels spin regulator (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21

– electronic accelerator pedalcontrol (EPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22

– electronic immobilizer. . . . . . 2.19

– Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21

– engine oil pressure/level . . . 2.18

– fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16

– indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15

– main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16

– parking light/dipped beam . . 2.21

– preheating system. . . . . . . . . 2.22

– rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22

– seat belt warning lamp . . . . . 2.17

– selector lever position. . . . . . 2.16

– tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19

– trailer indicators . . . . . . . . . . 2.16

6 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––GENERAL INDEX

GENERAL INDEX

– warning lamps display screen 2.16

– windscreen washer water level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20

Warning triangle. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55

Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27

Washing vehicle with high pressure cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28

Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.61

Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.68

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59

Wheelspin control (TCS) . . . . . . . 3.10

Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39

Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . 3.50

– Filling the container . . . . . . . 3.50

Windscreen wipers and washers 2.51

– windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53

GENERAL INDEX –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––7

GENERAL INDEX

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types andmodels. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changesregarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For thisreason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in thiscurrent handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of infor-mation at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included inthe current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEATallows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.10.03

Inglés 1M5012003AN (07.03)

(GT9)

toledo owner s manual

Documents

nnot hhesitate tto

complete vehicle walleton

text iin bbold pprint

notes oon ddirectionapart

certain markets

safety ffirstthis chapter

certain markets

notbe available